JP6538611B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  As a game machine, for example, when a game medium such as a game machine is shot into a game area by a launch device, and when the game medium wins in a prize area such as a prize hole provided in the game area, the start condition is established. (Display symbol) is variably displayed (variable display), and there is a game in which game interest is enhanced by a so-called variable display game in which it is determined whether or not to provide a game value based on the display result. In such a gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous for the player is obtained.

  Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines capable of adjusting rendering effects (volume, brightness, etc.) even during execution of variable display by the operation of the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-104089, A

  As in the technology described in Patent Document 1, when adjustment of the rendering effect is possible even during the execution of the variable display, when the adjustment image is displayed according to the operation of the player, the variable display result is derived and displayed. The recognition may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in the recognizability of a variable display result derived and displayed.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of variably displaying identification information and deriving and displaying a display result,
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, variable display start setting processing (FIG. 80) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a card image shown in FIG. 80, a character image on the left of the card image, an image of a finger, etc.) as a result of the predetermined effect. 72) step S90531 is executed, etc., and the predetermined effect image is a common portion (for example, the card image in FIG. 80) which is a common aspect regardless of the result of the predetermined effect A character image on the left side, an image of a finger, etc.) and a specific part (for example, a card image in FIG. 80) which is different according to the result of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect execution means After the predetermined effect image is displayed in the first mode with low visibility (display mode with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80C and FIG. 80D), the first mode is displayed. It is also capable of displaying the predetermined effect image with high visibility second aspect of the specific portion (high display mode visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (E)),
Adjustment means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of steps S706 and S707) capable of adjusting the effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least while the variable display is being executed;
Adjustment image display means (for example, steps S708 and S703) for displaying an adjustment image (for example, adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 35B to 35D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period (for example, predetermined period T1) CPU for production control 120) which executes processing of S704,
Specific effect executing means capable of displaying a specific effect image during execution of variable display (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes character display processing for change effect of step S162);
And an error image display means for displaying an error image for notifying occurrence of an abnormality;
When the display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the adjusted image display means can not visually recognize the adjusted image in a period (for example, derived display period T2) in which the display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S710 to S712) or it is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the adjustment image is displayed semi-transparently or blinked).
The specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 23B).
The specific effect execution means sets the display mode of the specific effect image as a stationary mode at a position overlapping on the front side of the identification information in a period in which the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, according to the identification information Also, the display mode of the specific effect image is not set to the stationary mode at a position not overlapping on the front side (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S609),
The error image display unit preferentially displays the error image over the display of the adjustment image and the specific effect image (for example, in the process of step S57, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the abnormality notification command receives the error command) (D1) and (D2) as shown in FIG. 25 (D1), (D2), etc.), the error image is not erased even while the display result is derived and displayed (eg, FIG. 25). (See D2)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the specific part of the predetermined effect image, and it is possible to easily understand the part of the displayed predetermined effect that should be noted.
Furthermore, false recognition of the display result can be prevented, and the visibility of the error image can be secured.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
At least a part of the display area of the adjustment image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 25A).
According to such a configuration, since the adjusted image result image overlapping with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is erased, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the variable display result.

( 3 ) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) or ( 2 ),
When the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is maintained so as to be visible (see, for example, FIG. 25B), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demonstration display is erased (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) The processing in steps S659, S660, and S662 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to means 7 to means 16 described below. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and the game medium is won in a prize area such as a prize hole provided in the game area, a prize such as a predetermined number of prize balls Some gaming media are provided to a player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation") is provided when a gaming medium has a prize in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (a start condition is satisfied). When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, there is one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state such as a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. As such a game machine, there is known a game machine as shown in JP-A-2015-61709, which displays an effect image such as a notice image and makes an oblique line an effective line. In such a gaming machine, when the effect image is displayed, there is a problem that it is difficult to know which one of the displayed effect images should be noted. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying an effect image in which a portion to be noted can be easily understood.

(7) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a predetermined effect image (for example, a card image shown in FIG. 80, a character image on the left side of the card image, a finger The predetermined effect executing means (for example, a process to be executed before step S90531 of the variable display start setting process (FIG. 72) is performed) capable of displaying the image of the A common part (for example, a character image on the left side of a card image in FIG. 80, an image of a finger, etc.) which is a common mode regardless of the result of presentation and a specific part (for example, 80, and the predetermined effect executing means is a device according to the first aspect (FIG. 80 (C) or FIG. 80 (D)) having a low visibility. After the predetermined effect image is displayed in the display mode, the second aspect (a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80E) in which the visibility of the specific portion is higher than that of the first mode A predetermined effect image may be displayed.

  According to the above configuration, a specific portion of the predetermined effect image can be focused on, and a portion to be noted in the displayed predetermined effect can be easily understood.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (7), the predetermined effect execution unit displays the predetermined effect image in the first mode after displaying the predetermined effect image in the second mode, and then, The predetermined effect image is displayed in the second mode. For example, after the card image is displayed in a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the card in a display mode with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (C) or FIG. 80 (D) An image may be displayed, and then the card image may be displayed in a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (E).

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect image can be focused on.

(9) Further, the gaming machine according to (7) or (8) includes storage means (for example, the ROM 90121 or the like) for storing the predetermined effect image of the second aspect, and the gaming machine according to the first aspect The predetermined effect image may be generated from the predetermined effect of the second aspect stored in the storage means. For example, it may be generated using a blurring filter such as a Gaussian filter or may be generated by pixelation (with mosaic processing).

  According to the above configuration, the capacity can be reduced.

(10) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high probability state, etc.) advantageous to the player. Determining means (for example, processing for determining the special figure display result in the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 59) (step S90240), processing for determining the jackpot type (step S90244), etc.), and the determining means Display means (for example, variable display start setting processing (FIG. 72)) corresponding to the variation pattern in which the identification information is variably displayed in the display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 905) based on the determination result of Processing for setting the effect control pattern to be used as the usage pattern (step S90532) or the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process Further includes processing (step S90542) and the like for variably displaying the decorative design in the variable display effect processing (FIG. 73) based on the random display, and the display area is a specific display area (for example, an effective line (FIG. 76). The area on the middle line a, the upper line b, the lower line c, the upper right line d, the lower right line e) indicated by the solid line in (A) and the nonspecific display area (for example, an invalid line (FIG. A state including the area on the frame outside upper line f and the frame outside lower line g) indicated by the broken line in A) and in the first state (for example, time saving control is not performed (for example, low base state) In a state where the number is small, etc., the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-specific display area in a viewable manner, and the second state (the second state) For example, time saving control In a non-specific display area (for example, FIG. 78A or FIG. 78A). As shown in 78 (C), in the high base state, the decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed on the invalid line, or in the high base state, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the invalid line in semitransparent or inconspicuous colors. To do).

  According to the above configuration, the identification information can be easily recognized.

(11) Further, the gaming machine according to the above (10) is a specification capable of displaying a specific effect image (for example, the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 79) during execution of variable display of identification information. The effect executing means (for example, the processing of step S90544 of the effect processing during variable display (FIG. 73) and the processing of steps S90732 and S90733 of waiting processing per special drawing (FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) At least one of the identification effect execution means is capable of being arranged at an overlapping position on the forward side of at least a part of the identification information (for example, can be arranged as shown in FIG. 79); Even if the specific effect image is displayed in the stationary mode during the period of the section (for example, the chance zone effect image is displayed in the stationary mode as shown in FIG. 79C and FIG. 79E). There.

  According to the above configuration, the identification information can be easily recognized.

(12) Further, in the gaming machine according to (10) or (11) above, the identification information is variably displayed in a visible manner in the non-specific display area (for example, the area on the invalid line) (for example, FIG. In the low base state, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the form visible in the area on the invalid line as shown in 77 (B), and on the invalid line in the high base state as shown in FIG. The decorative design may be variably displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized in the area of

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during variable display.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a loss time change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of various commands. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a change pattern in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding display data storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a decision example of a reservation display change production and display change existence. It is an explanatory view showing a setting example of a reservation display change pattern and a change presentation timing pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a pending | holding display change pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an example of determination of a change production timing pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an example of determination of a change production timing pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of character display processing for change production. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete setting which displays various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rendering effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an adjustment result image etc. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the display period of an adjustment result picture, and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a change production setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of an icon display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of an icon display change pattern. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of operation promotion presentation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of operation promotion production processing. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each production. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by one mode of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various images displayed on the image display device 5; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of winning. It is an explanatory view explaining processing determination processing such as suspension. It is an explanatory view explaining a representation pattern etc., such as suspension. It is an explanatory view explaining chance zone production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of waiting processing per special drawing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of waiting processing per special drawing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and identifies each in a special view game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information), are variably displayed (variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. Different kinds of symbol numbers, such as one of “1” to “9”, may be attached to the plurality of types of decorative symbols variably displayed in the respective decorative symbol display areas. Such variable display of decorative symbols is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C in the image display device 5. The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, on the screen of the image display 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). In addition, for example, when variable display of various display symbols such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol is synchronized, the start and end of the variable display are performed at the same degree (same or approximate) timing, and the period of the variable display is the same (Is identical or approximate). The effect image indicating the decorative pattern is also referred to as an identification information image. Therefore, in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of effect images showing decorative symbols to be identification information images Is performed, and an effect image indicating a finalized decorative pattern to be displayed is derived.

  For example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) identification information such as a decorative symbol and to end variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Although the display state of such decorative designs is also referred to as temporary stop display of decorative designs, although the display result in variable display of decorative designs is not displayed definitively, fluctuation of decorative designs by scroll display or update display progresses The player can recognize that the game is not being played. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction. .

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The first hold display unit 5HR displays the first special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special view reservation storage number is a suspension number of variable display corresponding to the special view game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second hold display unit 5HL displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The second special figure reservation storage number is a pending number of variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting winnings by doing. That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game is not satisfied yet due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the started condition is satisfied. Is done.

  For example, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the start condition of the special drawing game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first start condition) If the first start condition for starting the special view game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when 1) The addition (increment) is performed, and the execution of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is suspended. In addition, starting condition of the special figure game which uses the 2nd special figure by the 2nd special symbol display device 4B due to the occurrence of the 2nd start winning which the game ball passes (enters) the 2nd starting winning a prize opening (the 2nd starting condition If the second start condition for starting the special view game using the second special view based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when The addition (increment) is performed and the execution of the special drawing game using the second special drawing is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure reservation memory number is decremented by 1 and the special figure game is executed using the second special figure Is decremented by one. In addition, when the first start winning combination occurs, the first start condition is not satisfied as long as the number of first special map reservations has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), and based on the start winning. The special drawing game may be invalidated, and only the payout of the winning balls may be made. In addition, when the second start winning combination occurs, if the second special drawing reserve storage number has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the second start condition is not satisfied, and based on the start winning combination The special drawing game may be invalidated, and only the payout of the winning balls may be made.

  In the first hold display unit 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special view game using the first special view is performed. In the second hold display unit 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special view game using the second special view is performed. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the first hold display, for example, left-justified. The first hold display unit 5HR is provided with four display parts according to "4" which is the upper limit value of the first special view hold storage number, and from the left end hold numbers "1", "2", "3" "," "4" should just be matched. When the number of reservations for the special view game using the first special view increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display on the first suspension display unit 5HR, suspension is performed in the first suspension display unit 5HR. A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of first special view hold storages in the left display portion corresponding to the number "1". If there is another first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR, a new first hold display is a display that is not displayed on the right of the display part where the other first hold display is being performed. It adds to a part (it corresponds to any of reservation number "2"-"4"). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in first hold display unit 5HR, when the special view game using the first special view is started by the establishment of a new first start condition, in first hold display unit 5HR While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the left display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display portions corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) to the direction (left side) of the erased display area. As described above, the first hold display unit 5HR is configured to perform the hold display corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 4A which has not been started yet.

  The second hold display unit 5HL may be configured to perform the second hold display, for example, right-justified. The second hold storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts according to the upper limit value of the second special view hold storage number "4", and the hold numbers "1", "2", "3" are sequentially arranged from the right end "," "4" should just be matched. When the number of reservations for the special view game using the second special drawing increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display on the second suspension display unit 5HL, the second suspension display unit 5HL suspends A new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increase in the second special view hold storage number in the display portion at the right end corresponding to the number “1”. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, a new second hold display, a display that is non-displayed next to the display part where the other second hold display is being performed It adds to a part (it corresponds to any of reservation number "2"-"4"). When there is a plurality of second hold displays in second hold display unit 5HL, when the special view game using the second special view is started by the establishment of a new second start condition, second hold display unit 5HL While deleting (digesting) the second holding display in the display area at the right end corresponding to the holding number "1", each of the second holding displays in the display area corresponding to the other holding numbers "2" to "4" Move (shift) to the direction (right side) of the erased display area. As described above, the second hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform the hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special view in the second special symbol display device 4B which has not been started yet.

  The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the on-hold display or a different effect image, corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display portion AHA is referred to as active display (also referred to as variable display correspondence display, display at the time of digestion, display this time, or the like). In the active display area AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special view game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first display area deleted (digested) by the first suspension display area 5HR Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display unit AHA, for example, the second hold storage unit 5HL is erased (digested) in response to the start of the special view game using the second special view when the second start condition is satisfied. Active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed. The first hold display or the second hold display and the active display may have the same color or pattern, for example, the active display may be displayed larger than the first hold display or the second hold display. It may be. However, the display mode of the active display in this embodiment may change to a display mode different from the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. Thus, the active display unit AHA is a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. During execution of, the corresponding display corresponding to the special drawing game is configured to be executable.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display unit AHA is disposed between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one disposed between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, and may be arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. It should just be. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL can also be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL may be arranged in an alternating manner.

  In addition to the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, or in place of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, a display may be provided to display the number of stored special figures. . In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the number of special view hold memories can be specified in the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for display are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are, for example, the number corresponding to the upper limit (for example, "4") in each of the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number (for example, 4 Components) are configured.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 5V smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is provided. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, a small symbol display area 5V is provided in the upper left portion. In the small symbol display area 5V, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols. The effect image indicating a small figure is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of the effect image showing the small symbol serving as the notification information image is performed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol serving as the display result is It is derived.

  Thus, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the display result is derived, variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a constant display mode, and disappears from the screen or a shield There is no need to be shielded. Therefore, the small symbol display area 5V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable symbol of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V are also sometimes called small symbols or small symbols for effect. In the small symbol display area 5V, for example, a plurality of types which can be identified in a display manner in which a part or all of them are common to each of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols An effect image showing a small symbol of may be variably displayed as a notification information image.

  In addition, a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the ordinary symbol may be provided, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed or not displayed at a predetermined time interval in a specific display color (for example, blue) in a fourth symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5 or outside the screen, for example This is realized by continuing the display control to repeat. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a mode that is easy for the player to recognize.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at positions away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is done. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect by the display in the image display device 5 to check the display state in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, whether or not the variable display is in progress by performing the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

  Under the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B has an electric tulip type role having a pair of movable wing pieces that changes between a closed state in which the vertical position is achieved by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character shown in FIG. (Normal motorized role) is provided to form a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off, the gaming ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening Do not close. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is on. ) Can be opened. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally open when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) the second start winning port while the solenoid 81 is in the on state. The game ball may be configured to be less likely to enter (pass) than the open state. In this way, the normally variable winning ball device 6B can not pass (enter) the first variable state, such as the opening state where the gaming ball can pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, or the enlarged opening state. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  The game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed on the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media) based on the detection of the game balls by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first number of pending storages is a predetermined upper limit value If (eg, "4") or less, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second hold storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value. The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the gaming balls to be the winning balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be the winning balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter) become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) Easy to do. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). Do. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning winning ball device 7, the gaming ball is in the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the game ball to the big winning hole, which is difficult for the player. It is a disadvantageous second state.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is normally displayed (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a common drawing reserve display 25C is provided which displays the common drawing reserve memory number as the effective passing ball number that has passed through the gate switch 21 of FIG.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod may be provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 31A or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 35B may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray or the like at the installation position of the push button 31B, for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, etc. are disposed on the back of the gaming board etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, main board 11 controls lighting and extinguishing to each LED (for example, segment LED) etc. which constitutes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure and the second special figure The control of the variable display of the figure, and the control of lighting and extinguishing and coloring of the normal symbol display 20, etc. to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20, a predetermined display symbol A function to control variable display may also be provided.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the signals to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. And, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric component for presentation such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs an operation of turning on and off the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, etc. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for effect, such as all or a part, to perform a predetermined effect operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, etc. And a lamp driver circuit for supplying a driving current for turning on and off the lamp.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), and the count switch 23 are transmitted to the main substrate 11. Wiring is connected. The various switches may be of any type that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. Further, the main substrate 11 is connected with a wire for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like.

The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like is included. The effect control command also includes an abnormal winning notification command for instructing notification of an abnormality. When the abnormality notification command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12, as described later, the error notification process (step S57) is executed under the control of the effect control substrate 12 (see FIG. 12). .
Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data may be set in advance so that it always becomes "1" and the first bit of the EXT data becomes "0".

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may be at least incorporated with the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, etc. may be externally attached.

  In the gaming control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the progression of the game is countable, for example, by the random number circuit 104 or the like. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The gaming random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be For example, a random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and updating the stored value periodically or irregularly by the CPU 103.

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control stores various selection data, table data, and the like used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for transmitting control signals as various control commands from the main substrate 11 by the CPU 103, and a fluctuation pattern table storing plural kinds of fluctuation patterns are constituted. Table data etc. are stored. Various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 in a rewritable manner.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores effect control programs, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device 5, a random number circuit 124 for executing processing for determining control contents of the display operation in 5, and the like, the random number circuit 124 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120, and I / O 125 And is mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device as the effect electric component provided for the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the various information transmitted from the main substrate 11 as the effect control command.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated by the effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, for example. . The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random number values for determining various effects such as a random number value for stopping symbol determination in variable display of decorative symbols and a random number value for preliminary announcement effect determination Controlled by

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 121, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 120, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and end code etc. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used to control the effect operation.

  In the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, the display control data indicates, for example, display modes of various images on the screen of the image display device 5. More specifically, the display control data includes various symbols such as a background, a decorative symbol and a small symbol which constitute each frame (an image serving as a unit switched and displayed in a frame cycle) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 And data specifying the type, position, size, and the like of the effect image indicating a character or the like, and data specifying the display order (priority) in the case of superimposing and displaying a plurality of effect images. The data indicating the display order (priority) of the effect images may be any data indicating which of the plurality of effect images is to be arranged on the front side as viewed from the player.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control instruction from the effect control CPU 120 and the like. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control to execute variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5 or the like. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing which is more generally referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or any of non-volatile recording media such as a magnetic memory and an optical memory. It may be any configured image data memory.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 And including. For example, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, an instruction (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and an instruction transmitted to the lamp control board 14 from the output port of the I / O 125 (Electric decoration signal) etc. are output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be provided based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on the player having performed a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) the hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front of the case in pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is shot toward the game area by a shooting motor or the like included in the device. When the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area passes (enters) the first starting winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the gaming ball is moved by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection or the like. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts Be done.

  In addition, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 2 As a result, the second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special drawing game or the big hit gaming state, the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B is started Be done. However, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state.

  Based on the fact that the game ball having passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, a common drawing start condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the fact that the common drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is established, for example, that the previous common drawing game has ended, the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time passes, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol in the common drawing is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "per common figure", the open control and the enlargement open control are performed such that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is tilted. The closing control or the normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result or the variation pattern is the microcomputer 100 for gaming control of the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. From the stage to the effect control board 12.

  After the special view game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "Medium" and "Right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol, respectively. In the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, or in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the finalized special display result of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a finalized ornamental symbol as a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the image display device 5.

  When the jackpot symbol predetermined as the variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and it is a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. It is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. That is, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As the variable display result of the special symbol, the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed, and when the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes "loss" (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stop displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "big hit", predetermined on the screen of the image display device 5, The finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination is derived and displayed. As an example, a big hit combination is decided by the same decorative pattern being aligned and stopped on the predetermined effective line in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" The decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter a big winning opening and a winning ball is generated A round game (also referred to simply as a "round") in which the large winning opening is continuously opened is executed in the period up to. In a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the special winning opening is closed, making it difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When the gaming ball enters the big winning opening, the winning switch is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball every time the detection is made. The round game in the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”, etc.) is reached.

  When the variable display result is "big hit", it may be included if the big hit type is any of "non-probability change", "probability change", and "probability". When the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state advantageous to the player (opening the big winning opening) as a round game in the jackpot gaming state. A normal open round is performed in which the upper limit time is relatively long (for example, 29.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable", the upper limit time for making the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (big winning opening open) is relatively short as a round game in the jackpot gaming state A short open round is performed which is a time (e.g., 0.1 second). The jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “probable”, the upper limit time to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term opening round (the big winning port by the big winning port door The upper limit of the open period is a second period (e.g., 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. The same control as in the case where the normal opening round is performed may be performed except that the opening period of the big winning opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when the short-term opening round is executed, the number of second rounds (for example, "2") in which the number of round game executions is smaller than the number of first rounds (for example, "15") which is the number of executions of the normal opening round. It may be made to become. That is, the big hit gaming state where the short-term opening round is executed is in the first state where the gaming ball easily passes (enters) the big winning opening in each round game, compared to the big hit gaming state where the normal opening round is executed. At least one of the second period, in which the change period is shorter than the first period, and the second round number, in which the number of round game executions is smaller than the first round number Just do it.

  When such a short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball is won in the large winning opening. However, since the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 second or the like), it becomes a big hit gaming state in which no balls (prize balls) are substantially obtained. Therefore, the big hit gaming state (the second specific gaming state) based on the big hit type becoming "probable", the big hit gaming state (the first specific based on the big hit type becoming "non-probability change" or "probability change" The gaming state is more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state). In this way, based on the jackpot type being "non-probability" or "probability", the game ball can easily pass through the big winning opening when it becomes a big hit gaming state in which a normal opening round is executed. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning prize ball device 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state). On the other hand, when the big hit game state where the short-term opening round is executed is reached based on the big hit type becoming “probable”, the second change mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening is special Control is performed to change the variable winning prize ball device 7 into the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state).

  After the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result will be the "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to the positive change state higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability change control condition There is. In the definite variation state, predetermined definite variation end conditions are satisfied, such as the variable display being performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or the big hit gaming state being started before the number of times the variable display is performed reaches a predetermined number. It is controlled to continue until It should be noted that the definite variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of times of execution of the variable display. After the jackpot gaming state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a time saving state in which the average variable display time is shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as that a variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of times of execution of variable display reaches a predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable change” or “probable”, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes the positive change state.

  In a positive change state or a short time state, the game ball can pass (enter) the second starting winning opening more easily than in the normal state in an advantageous change mode in which the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the first variable state (opened state or enlarged open state) And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, control to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol (general figure variation time) in the regular game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state or the variable display result of the regular symbol in each regular game Control to improve the probability of being “per-figure” than in normal condition, tilt control time to perform tilting control of movable wing in ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result becoming “per-flat” Is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode by the control to make the length of the ball longer than that in the normal state, and the control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, control for changing the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "high base control"). By being controlled to such a definite change state or a short time state, the time required for the next variable display result to become a "big hit" is shortened, and a special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is attained. Even when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the high release control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, the decorative symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, the symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state where they match the big hit combination continuously for a predetermined time. Swinging, scaling, or deformation, or a plurality of decorative symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the display position is changed, and a big hit may occur before the final result is displayed An effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as "reach state") is referred to as "reach effect". As reach effect, displaying a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5, changing the display mode of the background image, and moving image different from the decorative pattern A rendering operation different from changing the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be performed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. are different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its appearance are called reach modes. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not the big hit combination, it becomes "loss", and the variation display state is ended.

  As the rendering operation in the reach rendering, a plurality of types of rendering patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (rendering modes) may be prepared in advance. And according to the production | presentation aspect in each reach production, the possibility (it is also called reliability or big hit reliability) of becoming a "big hit" differs. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, normal reach effect (normal reach) and super reach effect (super reach) are set in advance. And when reach production in super reach is performed, possibility (big hit expectation degree) that a variable display result will become "big hit" becomes high compared with a case where reach production in normal reach is performed. In addition, there may be multiple types of reach effects including the super reach which performs the specific reach effect which a big hit expectation degree becomes high compared with other super reach in the reach effect which becomes super reach.

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by a variable display mode of the decorative symbol. As an example, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is sufficient if the variable display effect of “pseudo-series” can be performed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “pseudo series” in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", in response to the start condition of the special drawing game being met once, the fixed display design (final stop design) that becomes the variable display result after variable display of the decorative design is started After temporarily stopping until the display is derived and displayed, it is possible to perform effect display that is again fluctuated (simulated continuous fluctuation) up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times, up to 3 times, etc.). The number of times of pseudo series change is the display of "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display except for the first change from the start of variable display of decorative symbol to the temporary stop of all decorative symbols at first. It may be the number of times that the decorative pattern changes again in all of the areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

  The variable display effect of “pseudo series” is, for example, a plurality of predetermined “pseudo series chances” of special combinations in “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The decoration pattern which is one of the kinds of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the variable display effect of “pseudo series”, a predetermined effect such as an image display serving as a re-change effect may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the first change. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to the one by performing the image display on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of the re-change effect different from the image display, a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside of the game area during each change display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of the “pseudo series” It may be controlled such that the lights are increased one by one. In addition, the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to be changed during the period of each variable display (including the first change), and it is possible to change one of the plurality of decorative LEDs to be lit. May be controlled.

  As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, an effect model provided inside or outside of the game area during the period of each change display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-ha” The movable member may be controlled to operate. At this time, the operation mode of the effect model (movable member) may be controlled to change during the period of each variable display (including the first change), and among the plurality of effect models (movable members) It may be controlled to change what operates in

  It may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo series”. . In addition, as the re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that is a pseudo continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may be controlled to output a sound that is a special sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to or in place of a part or all of these re-change effects, the lighting or blinking of the decorative LED, the operation of the effect model, the display of effect images, the display of sound effects, or the like It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining some or all of the outputs of. At this time, rather than the case where the re-variation effect is executed with only one type of effect mode, it includes a period in which the re-variance effect combining a plurality of effect modes is executed, or a plurality of re-variance effects When the effect mode in is changed, the possibility that a predetermined game value is given may be increased, such as the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit expectation).

  In this embodiment, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times in the variable display effect of the “pseudo-series”. Based on this, it is possible to make the variable display of the decorative pattern appear as if it had been started two to four times in succession. Then, when the number of times of repeated execution of the pseudo run variation (re-run) increases (the number of pseudo runs), the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is greater than when the pseudo run number is small. Get higher. In addition, the generation ratio of the effect may be controlled to change according to the number of times of repeated execution of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the number of pseudo continuous times). For example, it may be set as "reach determination" by performing pseudo linked fluctuation twice, and may be set to "super reach locked" by performing pseudo linked fluctuation three times. The number of times of pseudo series fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of "pseudo series" may be made to be able to be performed more than once or three times, for example, four times or five times.

  As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to the "pseudo ream", for example, "slip", "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "slip after stop chance eye" And various other rendering operations may be performed. Here, in the variable display effect of "slip", until after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed, "left", "middle" and "right" After changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the single or plural decorative design display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) among the decorative symbol display areas displayed temporarily. By changing the decorative pattern again in either or both of the decorative pattern display areas 5R and “right” and displaying it in a stop state, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  In the variable display effect of "Development Opportunity Eye", the decoration of "left", "middle", and "right" until variable decoration result of decoration design is derived and displayed after variable display of decoration design is started The temporary display of the decorative symbol constituting the development chance included in the predetermined special combination in all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is performed, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set as the reach state. Reach production is started. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of "Development chance eye end", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" An effect display is performed in which a decorative symbol of a combination predetermined as a development opportunity is derived and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", until after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the lost combination (special combination) which becomes a pseudo recurrent chance in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the "left", "middle", and "right" Unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo series” in which the decorative symbol is again changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative symbol is changed again in part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R As a result, effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed.

  Unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo series” during variable display of decorative symbols, for example, display of a predetermined effect image, an image display such as a message, audio output, etc. Depending on the rendering operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may reach the reach state, the reach effect by the super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is “ An advance notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of a "big hit".

  The production operation to be the advance production is the display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is sufficient if it is performed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Moreover, what is performed after the variable display mode of a decorative symbol turns into a reach mode may be included in the preliminary announcement effect which alert | reports that a variable display result may become a "big hit". In this manner, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol is derived as the variable display result. It should be something that can give notice of sex. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the contents (effect mode) of the effect operation in the case of executing such advance effect.

  Among the preview effects, there is included what is to be a preview advance effect (also referred to as “pre-reading effect”). In the pre-reading advance notice effect, the variable display result is “big hit” according to the presentation mode before the variable display is performed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility of the variable display result being “big hit” etc. It is a notice effect that can give notice of the possibility of becoming In particular, the pre-read notice effect for continuously giving notice over the variable display of the decorative symbol executed a plurality of times corresponding to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In preview advance notice effect, prior to the start of the variable display to be notified, for example, based on the pending storage of the special drawing game due to the occurrence of the start winning, etc. to notice the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" A presentation operation for the game is started. In contrast to the pre-reading advance notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display that is the advance notice object is started is referred to as a single advance notice effect (also referred to as a single advance notice, said fluctuation advance notice, or a notice effect during variable display). Be done.

  In this embodiment, the display portion of the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and the display portion of the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL as an example of the pre-read advance notice effect and the display mode at the normal time By changing the display mode to a different display mode, a previewing notice effect of "hold display change" is performed, which gives notice of the possibility of becoming a "big hit" or the like in the variable display to be notified. More specifically, the display color at the display site that displays the number of stored special images so as to be specified can be a specific color (for example, any of red, green, blue, etc.) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) at normal times By doing this, it may be notified that the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is higher than usual. In addition, by setting the display pattern in the first hold display or the second hold display to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry pattern etc.) different from that at the normal time, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is higher than usual. May be notified. Alternatively, by using a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, "secret" or the like) as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is informed that the possibility of the display color changing to the specific color is higher than usual Suggestion) It may be possible. The pending display which suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggested pending display. The pre-read notice effect of "pending display change" is also referred to as pending display change presentation.

  The previewing notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start winning is executed (started) before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the advance notice producing is realized after the occurrence of the start winning. As long as it is For example, the prefetching notice effect for informing that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state by the occurrence of a certain start winning, from at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start winning becomes reach state (or non reach state) What is necessary is to be executed (started) before. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice effect foretelling that the variable display result may become a "big hit" by the occurrence of a certain start winning is more than the fixed decoration symbol being stopped and displayed at least in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting winning. What is necessary is to be executed (started) before.

  When the on-hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the on-hold display may change or may not change. The effect that the display mode of the pending display changes among the pending display change effects is also referred to as the pending display change success effect. The effect that the display mode of the pending display does not change among the pending display change effects is also referred to as the pending display change failure effect. In addition, the on-hold display change effect includes the on-hold display change common effect. When the on-hold display change effect is executed, the on-hold display change common effect is first executed in common when changing and not changing the display mode of the on-hold display. The pending display change common effect displays, for example, an effect image indicating a character (character for change presentation) prepared in advance on the screen of the image display device 5, and exerts an effect on the pending display corresponding to the variable display to be an object It only needs to include such effects.

  The effect image indicating the character in the on-hold display change common effect is an example of the specific effect image. In addition, the promotion display image P etc. which are mentioned later are also an example of a specific effect image. The effect image indicating the character may be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continuously over a plurality of variable displays based on the setting according to the determination result of executing the on-hold display change effect. The effect image indicating the character to be the specific effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side with respect to the player as compared to at least a part of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern to be the identification information image. In this case, in the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image showing the character to be the specific effect image is static at a position overlapping in front of the effect image showing the decorative symbol It is an aspect.

  The display effect of the hold display change common effect is by acting on either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL. It may be a display effect that suggests that there is a possibility of change. With such a display effect, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a predetermined sound effect, a part or all of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED is lit in a predetermined lighting mode, The movable member may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

  When the on-hold display change success effect is executed after the on-hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the on-hold display that has been operated by the on-state effect is changed. As described above, the effect that the display mode of the on-hold display having an effect changes after the effect on the on-hold display change common effect is executed is also referred to as on-hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the on-hold display change failure effect is executed after the on-hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the on-hold display that has been operated by the on-state effect is not changed. As described above, the effect that the effect display in the on-hold display change common effect is executed but the effect that the display mode of the on-hold display having the function does not change is also referred to as on-hold change change effect as the first failure effect.

  In this embodiment, as an example of a single advance notice effect, by changing the display of the effect image in the active display unit AHA to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, “big hit in the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied. A notice effect of “active display change” is performed to give notice of the possibility of becoming “.” More specifically, the variable display result is obtained by setting the display color in the active display portion AHA to a specific color (for example, any of red, green, blue, etc.) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) at the normal time. It may be notified that the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is higher than usual. In addition, by making the icon displayed on the active display unit AHA a specific icon different from the round plain color at the normal time, for example, a message such as “?”, “Chance”, “extensive heat” or the like is notified, It may be suggested that the variable display result may be a "big hit". In addition, the icon displayed on the active display unit AHA has an icon for notifying a message such as “NEXT”, for example, to notify that a pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect of “pseudo run” is to be performed. It is also good. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as active display change effect.

  When the active display change effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode such as the display color and the icon of the active display in the active display unit AHA changes and when it does not change. An effect in which the display mode of the active display changes among the active display change effects is also referred to as an active display change success effect. An effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change among the active display change effects is also referred to as an active display change failure effect. In addition, the active display change effect includes an active display change common effect. When the active display change effect is executed, first, the active display change common effect executed in common when changing the display mode of the active display and not changing it is executed.

  Similar to the on-hold display change common effect, for example, the active display change common effect causes the effect image indicating the character (character for change effect) to be the specific effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and acts on the active display It only needs to include an effect effect that exerts. Active Display Change The effect presentation in the common presentation may be any display presentation that suggests that the display mode of the active display may change by acting on the active display in the active display unit AHA. With such a display effect, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a predetermined sound effect, a part or all of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED is lit in a predetermined lighting mode, The movable member may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

  When the active display change success effect is executed after the active display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the active display which has an effect by the effect effect is changed. As described above, the effect of changing the display mode of the active display having an effect after the action effect in the active display change common effect is executed is also referred to as the active change effect as the second success effect. On the other hand, when the active display change failure effect is executed after the active display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the active display which has an effect due to the effect effect is not changed. As described above, the effect that the action display in the active display change common effect is executed but the display mode of the active display that has exerted the function does not change is also referred to as the active change change effect as the second failure effect.

  An effect of changing the display color of the hold display or the display color of the active display is also referred to as a display color change effect. An effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, "secret" or the like) is also referred to as a special display change effect. The effect of changing the icon displayed on the active display unit AHA to a specific icon different from the round plain color is also referred to as icon display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stop displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "loss", the variable display mode is "non reach" ("normal" Also included are cases where it is a loss, and cases where the variable display mode is a "reach" (also called a reach loss). When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, a predetermined decorative pattern combination that does not become reach without the variable display state of the decorative pattern being in the reach state (non-reach) Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is "reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination (reach combination) of decorative designs is displayed as a stop (derived). The decorative pattern that constitutes the non-reach combination or the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol to be the lost pattern.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 having executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disable state and executes predetermined game control timer interrupt processing. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Includes processing to control the progress of the

  The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 through the switch circuit 110. The main side error processing is processing for diagnosing abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling generation of a warning if necessary according to the result of the diagnosis. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number updating process is a process for updating at least a part of the plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software.

  As an example, random numbers for special display display determination, a random number MR2 for determination of a big hit type, random numbers MR2 for determination of fluctuation patterns, and random numbers MR3 for determination of fluctuation patterns are used as game random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side. A random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special figure game as the "big hit". When the variable display result is "big hit", the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type determines the big hit type to one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability change", "probability change", or "probability" Is a random value used for The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random number value MR5 for determining the common drawing display result closes the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B with the variable display result of the normal symbol in the common drawing game as "per common drawing" (normal opening State) is a random number used to determine whether or not the game ball is controlled to be in the open state (enlarged open state) which is more likely to pass (enter) at a higher frequency.

  In the special symbol process process included in the timer control process for game control, the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display in the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operation and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process processing controls the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation setting of the movable wing in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, etc. Is a process that enables In the normal symbol process processing, as high open control associated with the time saving control, control for shortening the variation time (general variation time) of the regular symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state or Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common drawing" in the regular game in comparison with that in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device based on the variable display result being "per common drawing" The control for making the tilt control time for performing tilt control of the movable wing in 6B longer than that in the normal state, and part or all of the control for increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 or the like. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, the transmission of effect control commands based on the settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM Run.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first determines based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of first special drawing pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special drawing game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (for example, "4") (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, thereby suspending the first special view. It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the starting opening which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at step S201 (step S201; No), or when the number of first special view storages has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; Yes) Whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on is determined based on a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the number of second special view pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the second special view, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether (for example, "4") is set (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second hold storage count value, which is a storage value of a second hold storage count counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, to hold the second special view hold. It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit (step S205; No), the starting opening buffer value is set to "2" (step S206).

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S206 is executed, the pending storage count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increment. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increment. In this way, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special view reserve storage number is updated to increase by 1, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special view reserve storage number is updated to increase by . At this time, the total on-hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the on-hold storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined gaming random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random value data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored as hold data at the top of the empty entry in the special view hold storage unit according to the start port buffer value (step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special view hold storage unit while the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold is performed. Data is set in the second special view reserve storage unit. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start prize occurs, but has not been started yet The special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored as hold storage. The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game that has not started yet although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning occurs. (The special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as pending storage.

  The first special view reserve storage unit is, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition by passing (entering) the gaming ball in association with the holding number in the winning order (the detection order of gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening. The random number value MR1 for special image display result determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variable display result in this special view game (special view display result Whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on), whether the big hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" will be any of a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example It becomes holding storage information which makes it possible to determine whether or not the reach effect of the super reach, etc.). As described above, the first special view reservation storage unit establishes the first start condition for executing the special view game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 4A, but has not started yet Hold storage information of the special drawing game in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored.

  The second special view reserve storage unit is, for example, based on the establishment of the second start condition by passing (entering) the gaming ball in association with the holding number in the winning order (the detection order of gaming balls) to the second starting winning opening. The random number value MR1 for special image display result determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variable display result in this special view game (special view display result Whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on), whether the big hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" will be any of a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example It becomes holding storage information which makes it possible to determine whether or not the reach effect of the super reach, etc.). As described above, the second special view storage unit holds the second start condition for executing the special view game using the second special view in the second special symbol display device 4B, but has not started yet Hold storage information of the special drawing game in the second special symbol display device 4B is stored.

  Following the process of step S210, setting for transmitting a starting opening winning combination designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S211). Subsequently, a winning random number value determination process is executed (step S212). Thereafter, a setting for transmitting the reserve storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), and the starting winning combination is made. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216), The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S212 of FIG. 4 as random number value determination processing at the time of winning. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result is "big hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 3, FIG. 8) described later. The decision on whether to control or not, the decision on the fluctuation pattern, etc. are performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, at the start winning timing at which the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 determines the winning time random number value determination process of step S212. It is determined whether it is a random number value MR1 determined to derive a big hit symbol as a special figure display result by executing, or a random number value MR3 determined as a variation pattern in which the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is a reach state It is judged whether or not. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening, whether the special image display result will be a "big hit" or not, It is predicted whether it will be in the reach state during the variable display of the symbol, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect to be the look-ahead effect by the effect control CPU 120 etc on the side of the effect control board 12 Can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first checks pachinko gaming by, for example, checking the state of a time saving flag or a probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is on, the gaming state is the probability change state, when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on, the gaming state is time saving, and both the probability change flag and the time saving flag When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state. In addition, whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state by checking the value of the special drawing process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102 It should be possible to identify.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state identified in this way is a big hit in the big hit gaming state (step S402). At this time, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress, it is further determined whether or not the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is being performed in the high probability state or the short time state (step S403). If it is determined in step S402 that a big hit is in progress (step S402; Yes), or if it is determined in step S403 that a high base is in progress (step S403; Yes), the starting port buffer value is "2" It is determined whether or not (step S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the high base is not in use (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S404; Yes), The various variable display contents are determined using the random number value extracted in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the variable display contents determined at the start winning combination include "big hit", "super reach determination at the time of losing", "reach determination at the time of losing", and "general at the time of losing".

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, data used for determining the special view display result corresponding to the current gaming state from the specific display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (table data for special view display result determination) Choose). In the special view display result determination table data, the range of the determination value to which the special view display result is assigned to the “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in the process of step S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, the variable display content is determined to be "big hit".

  If it is determined that the variable display content is not a "big hit" in response to the random value MR1 being out of the range of the big hit determination range, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. The super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of the loss can be determined as a random pattern with reach effect including super reach or normal reach regardless of the number of special map reserve memory numbers (randomness for fluctuation pattern determination The range of the numerical value MR3) may be determined in advance.

  When variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, it is prepared in advance using random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in advance a predetermined area of the ROM 101, etc. Among the plurality of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern to which the determined value matching the random number value MR3 is assigned as the fluctuation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing where the variable display result is “losing”, the assignment of the decision values to the plurality of variation patterns is performed as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) and FIG. 11 (B2). It differs according to the number of figure pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages. However, some of the determination values are assigned to the same (or the same type) variation pattern regardless of the number of first special view reservations and the number of second special views. In the table data making up such a variation pattern determination table, among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach, the range of the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach regardless of the number of Toko reserves storage However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach determination range. In addition, among the decision values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with reach effect including normal reach in the table data that constitutes the fluctuation pattern determination table, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern with reach effect regardless of the number of Toko reserves memory The range of the determined value may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 6 shows a determination example of the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing where the variable display result is “lost”. In the normal state where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which decision values as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) are assigned to variation patterns is used. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of first special view reserved memories. . On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether or not it is accompanied by the super reach according to the number of first special map reservations. It is determined that the fluctuation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is determined regardless of at least the number of first special map reservation memories.

  Also, while the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state or a time reduction state with time reduction control, the fluctuation pattern determination table in which the determination value as shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is assigned to the fluctuation pattern is used. Be In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of second special view reserved memories. . On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is within the range of "289" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the number of second special view reserved memories. .

  The number of Tokushu Pending storages when the start winning combination occurs (the number of first Toko standing by storages, the number of second Tokusou holding storages) matches the number of to specials storage when the variable display is actually started However, the change may be caused by the execution of the variable display or the occurrence of a new start winning after the occurrence of the starting winning. Therefore, there is a case that the table data selected due to the difference in the number of stored special figures may not match between the determination result at the start winning combination and the determination of the variation pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to determine and predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss", the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with at least super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is The common decision value is included regardless of the number of special map holding storage. Therefore, regardless of the number of special drawing reserve memories at the start winning combination or variable display start time in pachinko gaming machine 1, whether or not it is decided that it is decided to be the fluctuation pattern with super reach, reach effect including normal reach It can be determined whether or not it has been decided to be determined to be a fluctuation pattern involving.

  If the variable display result is "losing" during normal time when time saving control is not performed, the variable display contents if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300". Is determined to be "super reach determination at the time of loss," and if the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is within the range of "271" to "300", the variable display content is "reach determination at the time of loss" judge. If the variable display result is "losing" during the time saving control is being performed, the variable display content is within the range of "295" to "300" if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300". Is determined to be "at the time of lost reach at super reach", and if the random number knowledge MR 3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", the variable display content is "at reach when reach lost" judge.

  When it is determined in step S404 shown in FIG. 5 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" but "1" (step S404; No), the setting for limiting the winning determination in the process of step S405 is set. The operation is performed (step S406). Thus, based on the occurrence of the start winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening when high opening control accompanying time saving control is performed, or in the big hit gaming state It limits so that judgment of variable display contents is not performed. Thereby, when the special view game using the second special view is executed prior to the special view game using the first special view, the first start is performed during high opening control or in the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be secured by limiting the advance notice based on the winnings not to be executed.

  After that, the notification content at the time of the start winning according to the determination result in the process of step S405 and the setting in the process of step S406 is set (step S407). According to the contents of such notification, the setting for transmitting the at-a-time prize determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S408), and the at-winning number random number value determination process is ended.

  FIG. 7 shows a starting opening winning combination designation command (first starting opening winning combination designation command and second starting opening winning combination designation command), a holding storage number notification command (first holding storage number notification command and second holding storage number notification command), An example of setting of the winning determination result command is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first starting opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as the starting opening winning designation command. Note that the subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, as the pending storage number notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first pending storage number notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second pending storage number notification command are prepared in advance. In addition, XXH shows that it is a non-specific hexadecimal number, and should just be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction | indication content by a production control command. In the pending storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the number of special views pending storage. Furthermore, a command C4XXH which is a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When the game ball which has passed (enter) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the steps shown in FIG. By determining in the process of S202 that the number of first special map reservations has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. 4 and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211, whereby the main substrate 11 produces effect control board The first starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 5, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. Furthermore, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 4 when the starting opening buffer value is “1”. Be done.

  When the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, as shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied by determining in the process of step S205 that the number of second Tokusou reserved memories has not reached the upper limit value. The second start condition is a condition for executing a special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 4 and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211, whereby the main substrate 11 produces effect control board The second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 5, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second boarding storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Be done.

  The effect control board 12 can detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first starting opening winning combination designation command is an effect control command for notifying establishment of the first starting condition. The 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command is the production control command which notifies the formation of the 2nd starting condition. The judgment result command at the time of winning is the time of the first starting winning at the time of detection of the gaming ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, and the time of detecting the gaming ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. At the second start winning, a comparison result (judgment result at the time of winning) using a gaming random number (such as a random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result) extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. Give notice. The first holding storage number notification command notifies the first special view holding storage number. The second holding storage number notification command notifies the second special view holding storage number. In this embodiment, the game ball passes (enters) either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening for the first holding storage number notification command and the second holding storage number notification command, and the start winning combination is While notifying that it has occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information specifying which of the first special map hold storage number and the second special view hold storage number has increased.

  In addition, the 1st pending storage number notification command and the 2nd pending storage number notification command correspond to the execution of the special figure game being started when either the 1st start condition or the 2nd start condition is satisfied. May be sent. Alternatively, when the number of pending storages increases, the command for adding the number of pending storages addition designation command indicating that the number of first special view pending storages or the number of second special view pending storages has increased (first pending storage number addition designation command or second While the pending storage number addition designation command is transmitted, the pending storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has decreased when the pending storage number decreases. A (1 pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. Total pending storage number notification command to notify the total pending storage number instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command or together with the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command May be sent. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  FIG. 7 (B) exemplifies the content of notification by the prize determination result command. Among the winning combination determination result commands shown in FIG. 7B, the commands C402H, C203H, and C404H may be transmitted when the special figure display result determination random number value MR1 is not within the big hit determination range. The variable display result is determined to be "losing", and the winning determination result that the control condition is not controlled to the big hit gaming state is notified. On the other hand, command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination is within the big hit determination range, and when the variable display result is determined to be the "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state The determination result (variable display content is "big hit") is notified. Command C402H is transmitted when random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination falls within the super reach determination range at the time of loss, and the result of the prize determination that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of loss (variable display content Notifies of “Super reach confirmed when losing”). The command C403H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is within the reach determination range at the time of loss, and the winning time determination result that the fluctuation pattern with reach effect is determined at the time of loss (variable display content is Informing "when reach lost" is notified. The command C404H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is neither in the super reach determination range nor in the reach determination range at the time of losing, and there is a possibility that the fluctuation pattern with reach effect may not be determined. The determination result (variable display content "general when lost") is notified. In this manner, whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" or a specific variation pattern is determined using the game random number extracted at the start winning, as the determination result command at the time of winning is used. The determination result information is sent as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or 4A is based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special view pending storage unit or the second special view pending storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" is the variable display result Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be any of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol (big hit symbol, in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B Missing symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". The variation pattern setting process includes, for example, a process of determining the variation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on a result of a prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is to be a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the variable display time from when the variable display of the special symbol is started to when the determined special symbol to be the variable display result is derived is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" when the variable display result is "loss". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" by determining the change pattern when the variable display result is "loss" in the change pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process includes a process of setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4 and a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to be varied. . Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". The special symbol stop processing includes processing for stopping the variation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and performing the setting for stopping and displaying the confirmed special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol. When the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed, a setting for transmitting a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 is performed as an effect control command capable of specifying that the display result in the variable display is derived. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is on. When the jackpot flag is on, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state based on that the special drawing display result is "big hit" is set, and the value of the special drawing process flag is Update to 4 ”. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the variable display result becoming “big hit” etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and performing the setting to open the big winning opening It is included. When the big hit opening pre-processing is executed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, it is determined whether or not the number of times of execution of the round game with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "2" or "15" according to the big hit type). It includes processing to be performed and processing to wait until the next round game is started when the upper limit number of times has not been reached. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, etc. The process includes a process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to a definite change state or a short time state according to success or failure of the definite change control condition, and the like. Then, when the setting for controlling to the definite variation state or the short time state is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (step S 231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second Tokushu Pending storages is other than “0” at Step S 231 (Step S 231; No), it is stored in the head area (the storage area corresponding to Pending Number “1”) Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number is read out as pending data (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (the second starting winning) at the second starting winning opening is read out in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting one, for example, by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") lower than the pending number "1" in the second special view pending storage unit is advanced by one entry each shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of pending storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special drawing designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special drawing designation buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is "0" at step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the number of first special drawing holding memories is "0" (step S235). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first pending storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls passed (enter) the start winning opening, the first Starting area data indicating which of the starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole the game ball has passed (entered) with the holding data or separately from the holding data, in association with the holding number, a predetermined area of the RAM 102 In order to be able to specify the order in which the starting condition is satisfied, it is possible to store the special figure game corresponding to each of the reserved data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1 by, for example, subtracting 1 from the first pending memory number count value, and so on. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the pending number “1” in the first special view pending storage unit is advanced one entry at a time shift. In addition, in the process of step S237, the total number of pending storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special feature designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined as either "big hit" or "loss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "loss". , As long as it is assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special view display result by referring to the special view display result determination table based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination read out from the variation random number buffer. When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S239, the display result of the special symbol derived in the special figure game becomes the big hit symbol as the specific display result, and the decorative symbol is variable. After the display result derived in the display becomes the determined decoration symbol of the big hit combination, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In this manner, by executing the processing of step S239, the CPU 103 can determine whether to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the definite change state and the definite change control is being performed, the special drawing is performed at a higher rate than when the definite change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. The display result is determined to be "big hit". The definite change state is started, for example, by the positive change flag being set to ON corresponding to the case where the big hit type is either “positive change” or “probable” by the big hit end processing of step S117 shown in FIG. 3. Be done. When in the definite change state, the special view display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than when the positive change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

  The CPU 103 determines whether the special map display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). If the special view display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241) . Also, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S 242). As an example, in the process of step S 242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 or the like is selected, and is set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for jackpot type determination depends on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure It may be assigned to the decision result of which type to use. The CPU 103 may determine the big hit type by referring to the big hit type determination table based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type read from the random number buffer for variation.

  After the process of step S242 is performed, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the big hit type by storing data indicating the determination result of the big hit type in a big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102.

  If the special view display result is not a "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No) or after executing the process of step S243, the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result of the special symbol in the special view game is determined (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a finalized special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of big hit symbols according to the big hit type determination result in step S242 If it is decided, it should be decided on the special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "1" (step S245), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. When the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1" in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in step S235 is "0" (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S246), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a presentation control command (waiting customer demonstration designation command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special view display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lost time when the special view display result is "loss" is determined (step S263).

  In the process of step S262, for example, the big hit variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 or the like. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, it is sufficient if a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to the fluctuation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 coped with the case where the variable display result is "big hit" by referring to the big hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination read out from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern may be determined. Further, in the process of step S263, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determining table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 or the like. In the loss variation pattern determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination may be allocated to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 coped with the case where the variable display result is "loss" by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination read out from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern may be determined.

  FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "loss", the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "not reach" not to be reach state and it is "reach state" A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each case of "reach" and corresponding to a case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "reach" , Reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as reach loss fluctuation pattern). The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which reach effect in super reach is performed.

  FIG. 11 shows a determination example of the big hit fluctuation pattern and the lost fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 9, for example, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 11 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 11A, any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 is used at a predetermined ratio as the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. To be determined. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, when it is a normal time when the time saving control is not performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined, for example, at a ratio as shown in FIG. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, when the time saving control is being performed, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined, for example, at a ratio as shown in FIG. 11 (B2). In the process of step S263, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is to be the reach state when the variable display result is "loss" by determining the change pattern at the time of the loss. In addition, it may be determined whether or not to be in the reach state when the variable display result is “loss” by processing separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the determined values assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to the fluctuation pattern PB3-4, are the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern It is set so that it may become more than the decision value allocated with respect to the fluctuation pattern with reach production in normal reach like PA3-3. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11 (B1) and FIG. 11 (B2), the determination values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, fluctuate It is set so that it may become more than the decision value allocated to the fluctuation pattern with reach production in super reach, such as pattern PB2-1-fluctuation pattern PB2-4. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is performed, the possibility (big hit expectation) of the variable display result becoming “big hit” is enhanced.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B1), a determination value to be assigned to a different change pattern is included depending on whether the number of first special view reservations is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, if the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, the determination value in the range of “151” to “180” is allocated to the variation pattern PA1-1, and the first special view reservation storage number is 1 If it is, it is allocated to fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the number of first special view reservation memories is 2 or more, it is allocated to fluctuation pattern PA1-3. By such setting, it is possible to make the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol different according to the number of first special image holding storages. In particular, when the number of first special view reservations is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time should be shorter than when the number of first special views is less than the predetermined value It is only necessary to assign a determined value to each variation pattern so that During normal time when time saving control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, and the frequency of executing a special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special view game using the second special view is satisfied, regardless of the second special view hold storage number, the first special view hold storage number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) The determination of the fluctuation pattern may be performed with reference to the same table data as in FIG. Alternatively, regardless of the number of second special view pending storages when the start condition of the special view game using the second special view is satisfied, reference is made to table data corresponding to the number of first special views pending storage at that time. The determination of the variation pattern may be performed. Alternatively, in response to the special view game using the second special view being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data different from B1) in the assignment of the determination value. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special view game using the second special view is satisfied, the "first special view pending storage number" shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is replaced with "the second special view pending storage number", The determination of the fluctuation pattern may be performed with reference to table data corresponding to the second special map reserve storage number.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B2), a determination value to be assigned to a different change pattern is included depending on whether the second special view reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, it is possible to make the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol different according to the number of second special drawing reservations. In particular, when the number of second special view reservations is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time should be shorter than when the number of second special views pending storage is less than the predetermined value. It is only necessary to assign a determined value to each variation pattern so that While the time saving control is being performed, the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening, and the frequency of executing a special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special drawing game using the second special drawing is executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is repeated if the time is short There is a high possibility of being executed, and the frequency of executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing is low. Then, when the start condition of the special view game using the first special view is satisfied, the second special view reservation storage number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special view game using the first special view is satisfied, regardless of the first special view hold storage number, the second special view hold storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0"). The determination of the fluctuation pattern may be performed with reference to the same table data as in FIG. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data having a different assignment of decision value from that of FIG. 11 (B2) regardless of the number of first special image storages. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special view game using the first special view is satisfied, the “second special view pending storage number” shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is replaced with “first special view pending storage number”, The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special map reservation storage number.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S263, a special figure fluctuation time which is a variable display time of the special symbol is set (step S264). Special figure fluctuation time that is the variable display time of the special symbol, from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time it is derived derived display of the finalized special symbol that will be the variable display result It is. As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special pattern fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of steps S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special figure fluctuation time.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S264, of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, start In order to start one of the special drawing games for which the condition is satisfied, setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S265). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After executing the process of step S265, transmission setting of a command at the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 transmits a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, the first to the presentation control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 transmits a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, the second to the presentation control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is an effect control command which designates the fluctuation start in the special figure game which had been. The first change start command and the second change start command are also simply referred to as a change start command. The fluctuation pattern designation command is variably displayed on the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is an effect control command for specifying a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After the process of step S266 is executed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2" (step S267), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. When the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation processing of step S112 shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the effect control main process starts, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets CTC (on the effect control board 12) Perform register settings etc. for the counter / timer circuit. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S52; No), the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off, and command analysis processing is executed (step S54). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which of the effect control commands is received by checking the MODE data of the reception command or the like. . At this time, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the winning judgment result command and the first hold storage number notification command are received, the first area provided in the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) is provided. The first start opening winning combination designation command and the first hold storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest pending display number which is the buffer number among the free areas in the start winning command buffer. On the other hand, when the second reserve storage number notification command is received together with the second start opening winning combination designation command, the second start winning combination command buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control buffer setting unit) of RAM 122 Among them, the second start opening winning combination designation command and the second hold storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest hold display number which is the buffer number.

  The first start winning command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (first start opening winning combination designation command and first hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. A storage area is secured for storage. According to the reception order, the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command received when the first start winning occurs, and stores the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start win command buffer. Store in order from the top of the free space in. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special view hold storage number.

  The second start winning command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (a second starting opening winning designation command and a second pending storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of a second start winning. A storage area is secured for storage. According to the reception order, the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command received when the second start winning occurs, and stores the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start win command buffer. Store in order from the top of the free space in. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special view hold storage number.

  After executing the command analysis process, an effect control process process is executed (step S55). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as display operation of effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the light emitting body such as decorative LED The control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11. Subsequent to the effect control process, the effect random number updating process is executed (step S56), and numerical data representing the effect random number counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is calculated by software as various random number values used for effect control. Update.

  Subsequently, when an abnormality notification command included in the effect control command is received from the main substrate 11, an error notification process (step S57) is performed to notify the occurrence of an abnormality according to the command. In the error notification process, for example, under the control of the CPU 120 for effect control, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5, and audio for notifying the occurrence of the abnormality is received from the speakers 8L and 8R Make it output. After execution of the error notification process, the process returns to step S52.

  The error image may be displayed on the entire surface of the display area of the image display device 5 (full screen display) as shown in FIG. 25 (D1), or as shown in FIG. 25 (D2) Alternatively, it may be displayed in part of the display area of the image display device 5 (partial display). Further, for example, if the abnormality notification command indicates an abnormal winning, an error image is displayed in the form of a full screen display, and the abnormality notification command indicates a dropout error (the game ball stored in the lower plate has a prescribed amount The display mode of the error image may be changed according to the type (level of severity) of the error, such as displaying in the form of a partial display, in the case of indicating the error when exceeding).

  In this embodiment, the error image is not erased from the image display device 5 until the error indicated by the abnormality notification command is eliminated. Accordingly, the error image is not erased during the derivation display of the variable display result (see FIG. 25 (D2)), and the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment result image R described later. . Further, in this embodiment, although the volume as the rendering effect can be adjusted by the operation of the player as described later, the error sound can not be adjusted with the initial setting. This makes it possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of an error despite the occurrence of an error.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 13, first, a hold display setting process is executed (step S161). The hold display setting process updates the first hold display on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL at the start winning case where the first start winning combination and the second start winning combination have occurred. Includes processing for In the hold display setting process, for example, a determination process or a setting process for executing a prefetch notice effect of “hold display change” using stored data of the hold display data storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 121 or the like. Contains.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the pending display data storage unit. In response to the execution of the special drawing game using the first special drawing being put on hold and the execution of the special drawing game using the second special drawing being put on hold: Various data for performing the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and various data for performing the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL are stored as hold display data. Corresponds to the first pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the special drawing game using the first special figure as the pending display data storage unit, and the pending storage display of the special view game using the second special figure A second pending display data storage unit may be provided. In the reserve display data storage unit, for example, it is possible to specify the winning determination result, the reserve display change pattern, and the change effect timing pattern in association with the reserve numbers similar to the first special view reserve storage unit and the second special view reserve storage unit. A storage area for storing data shown in FIG. The winning determination result indicates the variable display contents of the special symbol or the decorative symbol specified based on the winning determination result command. The on-hold display change pattern is an effect pattern including designation of a display mode of the on-hold display to be changed in the pre-read advance notice effect of “on-hold display change”. The change presentation timing pattern is a presentation pattern including the designation of the timing for executing the advance notice announcement presentation of “pending display change”.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 13 as the hold display setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the effect control commands (start opening winning combination designation command, winning judgment result command, hold memory number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the start winning game. It is determined whether there is any (step S301). In the process of step S301, for example, whether or not a start opening winning combination designation command, a winning judgment result command, or a pending storage number notification command is newly stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer. The presence or absence of the command reception at the start winning combination may be determined by confirming the above.

  If no command has been received in step S301 (step S301; No), the pending display setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command is received (step S301; Yes), the winning determination result according to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "determination of winning determination" is specified (step S303). If it is the winning determination result other than "during winning determination limitation" (step S303; No), the presence or absence of the pending display change effect or whether the pending display change effect is executed, or the pending display change effect is executed The effect type in the case of performing is determined (step S304). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random value for holding display change effect determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and determines the holding display change effect stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. The presence or absence and the type of the pending display change presentation may be determined by referring to the table or the like. In the process of step S304, "no change effect production" in the case where the on-hold display change effect is not executed, or "on change effect (1)" or "on-change effect (2)" effect on execution of the on-hold display change effect One of the types is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the process of step S304 is "no change effect production" (step S305). At this time, if the determination result is "change effect (1)" or "change effect (2)" and is not "no change effect" (step S305; No), the presence or absence of display change is determined (step S305) Step S307). The presence or absence of the display change determined in the process of step S307 indicates whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display as the execution result of the hold display change effect. For example, when the on-hold display change success effect is performed after the on-hold display change common effect is performed in the on-hold display change effect, the display mode of the on-hold display changes, so that the display changes. On the other hand, when the on-hold display change failure effect is performed after the on-hold display change common effect is executed in the on-hold display change effect, there is no display change because the display mode of the on-hold display does not change. That is, by determining the presence or absence of display change in the process of step S307, it is determined whether to execute the on-hold display change success effect or to execute the on-hold display change failure effect. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random value for display change determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and refers to a display change determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. It is sufficient to determine the presence or absence of the display change by means of the In the process of step S307, it is determined to be "display change" or "no display change".

  After the process of step S307 is performed, it is determined whether the determination result is "no display change" (step S308). At this time, when the determination result is "display change present" and not "display change not present" (step S308; No), it is determined to be one of a plurality of suspension display change patterns prepared in advance (step S309). ). If it is determined in step S308 that the determination result is "no display change" (step S308; Yes) or after the process of step S309 is performed, it is determined to be one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns prepared in advance. (Step S310). Then, the pending display data storage unit corresponds to the new start winning combination in the pending display data storage unit, the data indicating the determination result of the pending display change pattern by the process of step S309 and the determination result of the change presentation timing pattern by the process of step S310 It is stored in association with the hold number (step S311). However, if the process of step S309 is not executed because it is determined to be "no display change" in the process of step S307, the pending display data storage unit holds a pending number corresponding to the new start winning combination. In association with each other, data indicating the determination result of the change presentation timing pattern is stored, while data indicating the determination result of the suspension display change pattern is not stored.

  If it is determined in step S303 that "determination on winning a prize is being restricted" (step S303; Yes), or if it is determined in step S305 that "no change effect is present" (step S305; Yes), or step S311. After executing the process of (4), the setting for updating the hold display at the start winning combination is performed (step S312), and the hold display setting process is ended. For example, when the number of first special view reservations is increased by 1 as the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the first suspension display in the first suspension display unit 5HR is increased by one, Add a new first pending display. On the other hand, when the number of second special view reservations is increased by 1 as the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening, the second suspension display in the second suspension display portion 5HL is increased by one, Add a new second pending display. In this embodiment, the normal display mode in the first hold display and the second hold display is a round solid color white display. In the process of step S312, as the initial display of the first hold display and the second hold display, update is performed so as to add the hold display to be a round solid white display.

  FIG. 16 shows a determination example of the on-hold display change presentation and the display change presence / absence. In the process of step S304 shown in FIG. 15, for example, any of “no change effect”, “with change effect (1)” and “with change effect (2)” at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16 (A). Decide on. In the determination example shown in FIG. 16 (A), the type and the determination ratio of the determinable on-hold display change effect differ according to the on-hold number and the determination result at the time of winning. When the hold number is any of “2” to “4”, “no change effect”, “with change effect (1)”, “with change effect (2)” according to the winning determination result. Decide on any of the If the hold number is "1", it is determined that there is "no change effect" or "with change effect (1)" at a rate that differs according to the winning determination result, "with change effect (2) "I do not decide." When the winning determination result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "no change effect" is the lowest, and "change at the time of lost reach super reach", "change at the time of lost reach", "change at the time of general" change The decision ratio of "no effect" is high. Therefore, when the pending display change effect is executed, the variable display result may be a "big hit", the reach effect may be executed in the super reach, and the decoration pattern variable, as compared to the case where the pending display change effect is not executed. The possibility of the display state becoming the reach state increases.

  The type of the on-hold display change effect may be any type as long as a plurality of on-hold display change effect patterns are classified according to the change mode of the on-hold display and the like. Among the types of pending display change effects, the effect type of "with change effect (1)" enables changing the display color of the pending display, while holding display that does not change to the display mode indicating a message such as "secret" Change production patterns are classified. Among the types of pending display change effects, for the effect type of “with change effect (2)”, the pending display change effect pattern is classified, which can change the display mode of the pending display to a display mode indicating a message such as “secret” ing.

  In the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 15, for example, the presence or absence of display change is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16 (B). In the determination example shown in FIG. 16 (B), the determination ratio of “with display change” differs according to the determination result at the time of winning. When the winning determination result is "big hit", the display change is always made (at a determination ratio of 100/100) and it is determined that "display change is made". If it is determined that the result at the time of winning a prize is "at the time of lost reach super reach", "at the time of lost reach at the end", or "general at the time of lost", it may be decided as "no display change" Yes, and in this order, the determination rate of "no display change" increases. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the hold display change effect, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" and reach effect in the super reach may be executed as compared with the case of no change. , There is a high possibility that the variable display state of the decorative design will be a reach state.

  In addition, if it is determined that "display change is made" when the winning determination result is "big hit", the display mode of the hold display even if the on-hold display change effect is executed corresponding to "no display change". If it does not change, it is determined that "big hit" will not be made in the variable display to be previewed, and there is a risk that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, even when the winning determination result is "big hit", it may be set so that "no display change" may be determined at a predetermined rate. In this case, it may be set so as to be determined as "no display change" at a sufficiently low rate as compared with other prize determination results.

  FIG. 17 shows a setting example of the hold display change pattern and the change presentation timing pattern. As shown in FIG. 17A, in this embodiment, the pending display change pattern ZHP1-1 to the pending display change pattern ZHP1-3, the pending display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the pending display change pattern ZHP2-3, the pending display The change pattern ZHP3-1 and the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 are prepared in advance. Withhold display change pattern ZHP1-1-Withhold display change pattern ZHP1-3, Withhold display change pattern ZHP2-1-Withhold display change pattern ZHP2-3, Withhold display change pattern ZHP3-1, 'with change effect (1)' While being classified into the effect type and changing the display color of the hold display, it is not changed to the display mode showing a message such as "secret". Hold display change pattern ZHP10 to hold display change pattern ZHP13 is classified into the effect type of "with change effect (2)", and the display mode of the hold display may be changed to a display mode indicating a message such as "secret" it can. In this manner, even if the plurality of pending display change patterns are classified into any of the plurality of effect types according to the display mode of the pending display displayed after executing the pending display change effect, etc. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in this embodiment, a change production timing pattern TP0-1, a change presentation timing pattern TP1-1, a change presentation timing pattern TP1-2, a change presentation timing pattern TP2-1 to a change presentation Timing pattern TP2-4 and change effect timing pattern TP3-1 to change effect timing pattern TP3-7 are prepared in advance. Each change effect timing pattern is one or more hold numbers (indicated by “1” to “3” in FIG. 17B) corresponding to the execution timing of the hold display change effect, or the execution timing of the active display change effect During the active display in the active display unit AHA corresponding to (indicated by “A” in FIG. 17B) is specified. The hold display data storage unit illustrated in FIG. 14 stores data indicating a change presentation timing pattern in association with the hold number. The execution condition of the on-hold display change effect is satisfied when the on-hold number designated by the change presentation timing pattern indicated by the stored data matches the on-hold number associated in the on-hold data storage unit. When the storage data corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased in the hold data storage unit because the variable display start condition is satisfied, active display is designated in the change presentation timing pattern indicated by the storage data. For example, the execution condition of the active display change presentation is satisfied. After the conditions for executing the on-hold display change effect and the active display change effect are satisfied in this way, for example, when a predetermined time has passed after variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it becomes the execution timing for the on-hold display change effect and the active display change effect , Hold display change presentation or active display change presentation is executed (started).

  With a combination of such a pending display change pattern and a change presentation timing pattern, a pending display change effect that changes the display color to a specific color different from normal as the display mode of the pending display, and a display color as the display mode of the active display With regard to the active display change effect to be changed to a specific color different from normal, the presence or absence of each execution and the display color (specific color) after the execution can be collectively determined when the start winning combination occurs. That is, in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening for the presence or absence of execution, the execution timing, the contents of the execution (display color after change), etc. When entering, it can be decided collectively.

  In the process of step S 309 shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 120 for effect control extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the pending display change pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, etc. It is sufficient to determine one of a plurality of pending display change patterns by referring to the pending display change pattern determination table prepared and prepared.

  FIG. 18 shows a determination example of the suspension display change pattern according to the effect type of the suspension display change presentation “with change presentation (1)”. When the effect type of the on-hold display change effect is "with change effect (1)" and the winning determination result is "big hit", in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15, the determination as shown in FIG. The ratio is determined to be one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. On the other hand, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15, when the effect type of the on-hold display change effect is “with change effect (1)” and the result of the winning determination is “finalize on super reach determination”, FIG. Any one of a plurality of pending display change patterns is determined at a determination rate as shown in (B). In the determination examples shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, the determinable suspension display change pattern and the determination ratio are different according to the suspension number. For example, when the hold number is “3” or “4”, while the hold display change pattern ZHP 3-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate, the hold number is “1” or “2”. , And can not be determined as the pending display change pattern ZHP3-1. In addition, when the hold number is any of “2” to “4”, while the hold display change pattern ZHP 2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP 2-3 can be determined at a predetermined rate, the hold is on the other hand If the number is “1”, these pending display change patterns can not be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (A), the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 starts the hold display for white display which is the normal display mode, and then starts the display color for the hold display (the display color of the corresponding active display ) Is changed in three steps in the order of blue, green and red. The execution condition can be satisfied every time the variable display is started. Therefore, in order to change the display color of the hold display in three steps, it is necessary to execute (start) variable display at least three times after starting the hold display. Therefore, when the hold number is “3” or “4”, the hold display change pattern ZHP 3-1 can be determined, while when the hold number is “1” or “2”, the hold display change pattern By making determination impossible to ZHP3-1, the display color of a pending | holding display can be changed in three steps reliably. The hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 respectively change the display color of the hold display in two steps. Therefore, when the hold number is “2” to “4”, it can be determined to any one of the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, while the hold number is “1”. In this case, the display color of the hold display can be reliably changed in two steps by making it impossible to determine these hold display change patterns.

  Further, in the determination examples shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, the determination of the suspension display change pattern is made according to whether the winning determination result is “big hit” or “super reach determination at loss”. The proportions are different. For example, when the hold number is "3" or "4", when the winning determination result is "big hit", the percentage is higher at a higher percentage than when the winning determination result is "los reach at super reach". The display change pattern ZHP2-2, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, or the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17A, in all of the pending display change pattern ZHP2-2, the pending display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the pending display change pattern ZHP3-1, the display color of the pending display is finally red. Change to By such setting, when the display color of the hold display changes to red, it can be suggested that the variable display result is more likely to be "big hit" than when the display color changes to another display color.

  FIG. 19 illustrates a determination example of the suspension display change pattern according to the effect type of the suspension display change presentation “with change presentation (2)”. When the effect type of the on-hold display change effect is "with change effect (2)" and the winning determination result is "big hit", in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15, the determination as shown in FIG. The ratio is determined to be one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. On the other hand, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15, when the effect type of the on-hold change effect is “with change effect (2)” and the result of the winning determination is “finalize on super reach determination”, FIG. At the determination rate as shown in B), one of a plurality of pending display change patterns is determined. In the determination examples shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, regardless of the hold number, any one of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 is determined at a predetermined rate.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (A), when the hold number is any of "2" to "4", the effect type of "with change effect (2)" at a different rate according to the result of the winning determination. On the other hand, when the hold number is “1”, the effect type “with change effect (2)” can not be determined. Therefore, when it is determined in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15 that any one of the pending display change pattern ZHP10 to the pending display change pattern ZHP13, the pending number is one of “2” to “4”. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), the hold display change pattern ZHP11 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 respectively start the hold display to be white display which is the normal display mode, and then display the display mode of the hold display And the step of changing the display color of the hold display to any one of blue, green and red. The hold display change pattern ZHP 10 changes the display mode of the hold display to a display mode that indicates a “secret” message in one step. Therefore, if the hold number is any one of "2" to "4", the display mode of the hold display can be reliably changed in two steps.

  Further, in the determination examples shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the determination ratio of the suspension display change pattern ZHP10 is more sufficient than the determination ratio of the other suspension display change patterns regardless of the winning determination result. It is set to be low. Therefore, after the display mode of the hold display changes to a display mode that indicates a message of "secret", the display color of the hold display is more likely to change to any of blue, green, or red. Thus, when the display mode of the hold display changes to a display mode indicating a message of "secret", it can be suggested that the display mode of the hold display is likely to change to the specific mode.

  In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 120 for effect control extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a change effect timing pattern, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, etc. It may be determined to be any of a plurality of change effect timing patterns by referring to the change effect timing pattern determination table prepared and prepared.

  FIG. 20 shows a determination example of the change effect timing pattern corresponding to the case of the winning determination result being "big hit". In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 15, when the winning determination result is "big hit", one of a plurality of change presentation timing patterns is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 21 shows a determination example of the change presentation timing pattern corresponding to the case of the determination result of the winning combination being “super reach determination at the time of loss”. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 15, when the winning determination result is "determine at super reach determination at the time of loss", one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  In the determination examples shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the change presentation timing pattern and the determination ratio that can be determined differ according to the pending display change pattern and the pending number determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. When the result of the winning determination is "finalize super reach determination", "no change effect" is determined at a predetermined rate in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. At this time, since the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15 is not executed, the pending display change pattern is "none".

  In the determination example shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the hold number is “4” in the case where any one of the hold display change pattern ZHP 1-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP 1-3 is determined by the process of step S 309. In this case, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate, while the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 can not be determined if the hold number is any of “1” to “3”. It becomes. As shown in FIG. 17B, when the hold number is “3”, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 is the hold display change timing. An execution condition may be satisfied every time the variable display is started. Therefore, in order to execute the suspension display change effect when the suspension number is "3", the change presentation timing pattern is stored in the suspension display data storage unit in association with the suspension number "4" when the start winning is generated. Need to Therefore, when the hold number is "4", the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 can be determined, while when the hold number is any of "1" to "3", the change effect timing pattern TP3 By making it undecidable to -1, it is possible to execute the on-hold display change presentation corresponding to the variable display performed (started) when the on-hold number is "3".

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 21, when the pending display change pattern is "none", a change effect timing pattern TP1-1, a change effect timing pattern TP2-1, a change effect timing pattern TP3-1 according to the hold number. It is decided on either. As shown in FIG. 17B, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 designate a hold number of 1 as the hold display change timing. When the pending display change pattern is not determined, the display mode of the pending display does not change even if the pending display change effect is executed. Therefore, the hold change change presentation for the hold display of 1 can be performed once until the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started. In addition, a change production | presentation timing pattern may be determined so that the pending | holding change gusset production | presentation with respect to 1 pending | holding display can be performed in multiple times.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, in the case of the hold display change pattern ZHP10, a change effect timing pattern TP1-1, a change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and a change effect timing pattern TP3-1 according to the hold number. On the other hand, regardless of the hold number, the change presentation timing pattern TP0-1 can not be determined. As shown in FIG. 17A, the hold display change pattern ZHP10 is a display mode that indicates the display mode of the hold display as the message of "secret" after the start of the hold display that becomes the white display that is the normal display mode. Change to As shown in FIG. 17B, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 designates active display as the pending display change timing. As described above, in the case of the pending display change pattern ZHP10, the change display timing pattern TP0-1 can not be determined, so that when the active display change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is "secret". A restriction can be provided so as not to change the display mode shown. That is, the display mode indicating the message of "secret" is included in the display mode of the hold display displayed after the hold display change effect is performed, while the display mode of the active display is performed after the active display change effect is performed. It will be a special aspect not displayed as.

  After executing the on-hold display setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. 13, the character display process for change effect is performed (step S162). The change effect character display process is based on the setting according to the hold display change effect or the determination result of executing the active display change effect, based on the setting according to the hold display change common effect or the active display change common effect, A process for displaying on the screen of the display device 5 is included. In addition, the character display process for change effect is a process of determining whether or not the change start command (the first change start command or the second change start command) transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the symbol determination command has been received. And a process for controlling the display of the effect image showing the character according to the determination result of.

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the character display process for change effect performed in step S162 of FIG. In the character display process for change effect shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the character is being displayed (step S601). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that a character is being displayed, when an effect image indicating a character (character for change effect) used in the hold display change common effect or the active display change common effect is displayed. .

  If the character is not being displayed in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not there is a setting for a change effect (step S602). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the storage contents of the pending display change pattern and the change presentation timing pattern in the pending display data storage unit, and stores information corresponding to the determination result of executing the pending display change presentation and the active display change presentation If it has been done, it may be determined that there is a setting for the change effect. When there is no setting of the change effect (step S602; No), the character display process for change effect is ended.

  If there is a setting for the change effect at step S602 (step S602; Yes), control is performed to start the display on the screen of the image display device 5 for the effect image indicating the change effect character (step S603) The character display process for change effect is ended. In the process of step S603, the CPU 120 for effect control may change the display mode of the character for change effect depending on the determination result as to whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. Whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed may be specified from the value of the rendering process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the rendering control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. More specifically, when the value of the effect process flag is "2", it may be determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect process flag is other than "2", it may be determined that variable display of the decorative symbol is not in progress. When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command instructing to set the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode is output to VDP of the display control unit 123, for example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is not being performed, a display control command instructing the display mode of the character for change effect to be a stationary mode is output to VDP of the display control unit 123, for example.

  The action mode is a display position, size, rotation amount, movement direction, movement speed, movement amount, or part of shape, pattern or color of the change effect character according to the animation pattern prepared in advance. All may be the display mode of the change display (operation display) that changes with the passage of time. The change of the character for change presentation according to the animation pattern may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. With respect to such an action mode, the still mode may be a display mode of a still display in which the change effect character does not change even as time passes. In contrast to the stationary mode, the action mode is also referred to as the non-stationary mode or the behavioral mode.

  The effect image showing the change effect character whose display is started by execution of the process of step S603 is an image showing the character used for the on-hold display change effect or the action effect in the active display change effect. By performing the process of step S603, the effect image indicating the change effect character starts its display even before the start of the variable display in which the on-hold display change effect or the active display change effect is executed. Can. In this case, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays.

  If the character is being displayed in step S601 (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined display end timing has come (step S604). The display end timing is, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state or when the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, the hold display change production by the hold display change pattern or the active display change production or icon It may be any timing at which the display termination condition of a predetermined character for change presentation is satisfied, such as one of when the execution of the active display change presentation according to the display change pattern ends. If it is the display end timing (step S604; Yes), after the control for ending the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed for the effect image indicating the character to be the change effect character (step S605), The character display process for change effect is ended.

  If it is not the fluctuation end timing (step S604; No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S606). In the process of step S606, when any one of the first change start command and the second change start command is received, it may be determined that the change start command has been received. If the change start command has been received (step S606; Yes), after setting is made to start the display control during change (step S607), the character display process for change effect is ended. In the process of step S607, for example, as in the case where it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed in the process of step S603, a display control command instructing the display mode of the character for change presentation to be an action mode is It may be output to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character for change effect can be set to the action mode, triggered by the reception of the change start command capable of specifying the start of the variable display.

  When the change start command is not received at step S606 (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S608). When the symbol determination command is not received (step S608; No), the character display process for change effect is ended. On the other hand, when the symbol determination command is received (step S608; Yes), after setting is made to start display control at symbol determination (step S609), the character display process for change effect is ended. In the process of step S609, for example, as in the case where it is determined that the display of the decorative symbol is not being performed in the process of step S603, a display control command instructing the display mode of the change effect character to be a stationary mode It may be output to the VDP of the display control unit 123. As a result, in the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character for change effect can be set to the stationary mode.

  FIG. 23 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. 23A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for allocating Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 23B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the setting of the Z value by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include a small symbol display layer, a change effect display layer, and a decorative symbol display layer. In the small symbol display layer, an effect image indicating a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn. In the change effect display layer, an effect image indicating a character used in the on-hold display change effect or the active display change effect is drawn. In the decorative symbol display layer, an effect image indicating an decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" is drawn. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value which is a depth value used when drawing each effect image in a superimposed manner is set. The Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the small symbol display layer, the change effect display layer, and the decorative symbol display layer by setting the Z value by the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. Have different values depending on the display layer to be drawn.

  For example, when the image data read from the CGROM is written to a frame buffer of the VRAM or the like, the VDP of the display control unit 123 may determine the priority by performing a comparison operation of the Z value. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer in preference to the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value has higher priority than the effect image drawn to the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the player sees forward Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (B), the small symbol display layer on which the effect image showing the small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn is arranged on the most front side with respect to the player. , Z value is set. Therefore, even when a display effect by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed, the player can always visually recognize the display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V. In addition, the change effect display layer is a display layer that provides an effect area in which effect images used in the on-hold display change effect and the active display change effect are displayed, and on the rear side of the small symbol display layer The Z value is set to be arranged on the front side of the display layer. As a result, the effect image used in the on-hold display change effect and the active display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern. As described above, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design to be the identification information image. The plurality of layers may include an error image display layer. Then, for example, by setting the Z value so that the error image display layer is disposed on the front side of the small symbol display layer, the priority of the error image (see FIG. 25 (D1) (D2)) is set to other. It may be made higher than the effect image of.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process executed in step S163 of FIG. In this embodiment, by performing the effect effect setting process described below, during the game (FIG. 25 (A)) or during the customer waiting demonstration display (FIG. 25 (B)), by the adjustment operation of the player The volume can be adjusted as a stage effect. In addition, when the volume is adjusted, an adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the volume is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 5 in a state of being superimposed on the effect image or the demonstration image. The adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in the form of a bar graph display that increases and decreases in the left and right direction, as shown in FIGS. 25 (A), (B), and (C2). The mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode of displaying numerical values or characters corresponding to the volume, a circle graph mode, or the like.
In this embodiment, in the menu mode, when the item “volume control” is selected from the menu screen (FIG. 25 (C1)) and the volume adjustment mode is selected (FIG. 25 (C2)) It is only possible to adjust the volume. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. Further, as described later, in response to the reception of the predetermined operation during the display of the customer waiting demo, the display of the customer waiting demo is switched to the menu mode.

  When the effect setting process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the menu mode is being executed (step S701). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode in-progress flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if the on-state flag is off. The menu mode in-progress flag is set to the on state in step S 662 described later, and is cleared to the off state in step S 661 (see FIG. 27).

  If the menu mode is not being executed (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the adjustment result image display flag is in the on state (step S702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to the on state in steps S 708 and S 715 described later, and cleared to the off state in steps S 704 and S 712.

  When the adjustment result image display flag is in the on state (step S702; Yes), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 which has been determined in advance has passed since the adjustment operation reception time (step S703) . Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is an operation performed by the player using, for example, operation means such as the stick controller 31A, and in this embodiment, is an operation for adjusting the volume as a rendering effect. . The player adjusts the sound volume from within a predetermined range (for example, six steps of 1 to 6) by, for example, tilting the stick controller 31A to the left and right, and the volume at the time of stopping the tilting operation is It is determined as the volume as the adjustment result.

  Note that the volume determining operation may be performed by pushing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller 31A separately from the adjusting operation, or pressing the push button 31B. Further, the operation means for adjusting the volume is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross key or a dial-type operation means not shown. Further, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor or the like) may be used, and adjustment of the rendering effect may be possible by the adjustment operation of the player detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is predetermined as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the sound volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds) in this embodiment. It should be noted that whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the adjustment operation acceptance time, for example, is determined by the predetermined timer in the predetermined period T1 in accordance with the determination that there is the adjustment operation in step S706 described later (step S706; Yes). A corresponding value may be set and it may be determined whether the timer has timed out.

  Note that the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display luminance (light amount) of the image display device 5 or the effect effect lamp as the effect. The adjustment result image R may indicate the adjustment result of the luminance. Moreover, according to the adjustment operation, at least one of the volume and the brightness may be adjustable. Further, the predetermined period for displaying the adjustment result image according to the volume and the predetermined period for displaying the adjustment result image according to the luminance may be set to the same length, or set to different lengths. It may be done.

  In step S703, when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation acceptance time (step S703; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the adjustment result image R from the image display device 5, and the adjustment result image display flag Is cleared to the off state (step S704). By the process of step S704, when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the adjustment operation during the game or during the demonstration display, the adjustment result image R is erased. Subsequent to the process of step S704, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S706. Also in the case of No determination in the processing of step S702 or S703, the processing of step S706 is executed.

  In step S701, if the menu mode is being executed (step S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is being selected (step S705; Yes), the processing of step S706 is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the volume adjustment mode is selected if the volume adjustment mode selection flag is on, and determines that the volume adjustment mode is not selected if the flag is off. Note that the volume adjustment mode selection flag is set to the on state in step S664 described later, and is cleared to the off state in a predetermined case. For example, when a mode other than the volume adjustment is selected while the menu mode is being executed, or when the menu mode execution flag is turned off, the volume adjustment mode selection flag is cleared to the off state. When the volume adjustment mode is selected (step S705; Yes), the adjustment result image R is always displayed without passing through the process of step S704. In addition, even during the demonstration display, the adjustment result image R may not be erased even after the predetermined period T1. Even when the menu mode is being executed (step S701; Yes), when the volume adjustment mode is not selected (step S705; No), the rendering effect setting process is ended.

  In step S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an adjustment operation has been performed. For example, when the operation signal from the stick controller 31A (for example, the operation signal indicating the tilting operation in the left and right direction) is input, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the adjusting operation is present (step S706; Yes), and the adjusting operation is performed. The volume setting value corresponding to is stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step S 707). Also in the process of step S707, the volume setting value for the error sound stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 is not changed, and remains as the initial setting value.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the adjustment result image R notifying the volume setting value according to the adjustment operation, and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state (step S708). If the adjustment result image R is already being displayed (Yes in step S702, the process proceeds to No in step S703, and Yes in step S706), the volume setting value according to the current adjustment operation is notified. The adjustment result image R is displayed on the image display device 5 (updated from the adjustment result image R corresponding to the previous adjustment operation is displayed), and the adjustment result image display flag is kept on.

  After execution of the process of step S708 or when it is determined that there is no adjustment operation in the process of step S706 (step S706; No), the process of step S710 is performed.

  In step S710, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the variable display result derivation display period T2 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "derivation display period"). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is turned on when processing for causing a complete stop display (derivative display) as a final stop symbol to be a variable display result of the decorative symbol is started in the variable display effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not it is the derived display period T2 based on a flag that is set to 0 and cleared to the off state when the process ends. The derived display period T2 corresponds to the display period of the final stop symbol which is the result of the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Therefore, in this embodiment, the derived display period T2 is shorter than the above-described predetermined period T1. The derived display period T2 may not be constant. For example, the derived display period T2 may be set to be shorter in the time saving state than in the normal state.

  When it is the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (step S710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the adjustment result image display flag is on (step S711), and if it is on ((step S711) Step S711; Yes), erase the adjustment result image R, and clear the adjustment result image display flag to the off state (step S712). Thus, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed from the adjustment operation, the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2 (see FIGS. 26A and 26B described later).

  On the other hand, when it is not the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (step S710; No), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether the adjustment result image display flag is on (step S713). (That is, if the adjustment result image R is not displayed) (step S713; No), the process of step S714 is performed.

  In the process of step S714, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the variable display derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (whether the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed). . When the derivation display period T2 has passed and it is within the predetermined period T1 (step S714; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the adjustment result image R back (displays again), and the adjustment result image display flag is displayed. The on state is set (step S 715). Thereby, even if the adjustment result image R is erased in the process of step S712, it is not the derived display period T2 (step S710; No), but the derived display period T2 has passed but it is within the predetermined period T1 (step S710) As shown in FIG. 26B, the adjustment result image R is returned and displayed on S714; Yes).

  If YES at step S713, NO at steps S705, S711 and S714, or after executing steps S712 and S715, the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect setting process.

  When the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, the adjustment operation is invalidated or the volume setting according to the adjustment operation is invalidated without passing through the process of step S706 or S707. You may Further, the volume setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 may be configured to return to the default (initial setting value) at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, after a specific fluctuation, after a fluctuation has been performed a specific number of times, a customer demonstration display return timing, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. Further, a plurality of types of predetermined periods T1 having different lengths may be prepared, and may be used for each gaming state, for example. For example, in the time saving state, the predetermined period may be 10 seconds, and in the normal state, the predetermined period may be 5 seconds.

  Here, a main example in the case where the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2 will be described with reference to timing charts in FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (B). As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the predetermined period T1 becomes the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the latest adjustment operation is performed, but at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derivation display period T2 In the case of overlapping, the adjustment result image R is deleted (corresponding to step S 712). In the example shown in FIG. 26A, the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 26B is the case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again (step S715). And the display is continued until the predetermined period T1 elapses. Although not shown, when the derived display period T2 overlaps with the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. As described above, according to this embodiment, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the derived variable display result.

  FIG. 25A is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed on the lower right end of the image display device 5. And in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25A, the display area of the adjustment result image R is a display area Ar of the decorative pattern (an area including the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R). It overlaps with part of the

  FIG. 25 (B) is a display example of the adjustment result image R during demonstration display (during customer waiting demonstration display). During demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, when an image indicating that a customer demonstration such as “during demonstration display” is being performed is displayed on the image display device 5 and the adjustment operation is performed. The adjustment result image R is superimposed on the demonstration display image.

FIG. 25C1 is a display example of the menu screen in the menu mode. In this embodiment, in the menu mode, there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation by the player, and the volume adjustment is possible only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection example shown in FIG. 25 (C2). It has become. Selection of an item in the menu mode can be made by, for example, tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is pushed or pulled while selecting the item of "volume adjustment", or the push button 31B is By pressing or the like, a transition is made to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. 25 (C2). The operation means for item selection is not limited to the stick controller 31A, but may be a cross key (not shown).
The display mode of the adjustment result image R may be different between the game shown in FIG. 25 (A) and the volume adjustment mode shown in FIG. 25 (C2). For example, when the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R may be displayed larger than in the game, or may be displayed at the center of the image display device 5 or the like.

  FIGS. 25D1 and 25D2 are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process (S57) as described above. In this embodiment, the error image is (i) a variable display result. It is not deleted even during the derivation display, and (ii) is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R.

  After the rendering effect setting process is executed in step S163 shown in FIG. 13, for example, the following step S170 is performed according to the value of the rendering process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the rendering control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. One of the processes of S175 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process starts variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first change start command or the second change start command from the main board 11 is received. And the like. Then, when the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of the decoration pattern in and various other effect operations, it includes the process of determining the finalized decoration pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbol and the kind of display result etc. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 controls various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 Are included to perform various effect control during variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, during the variable display effect processing, in response to receiving the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11, etc., the finalized display of the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol A process of (derivative display) is included. In addition, in response to the end code being read out from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized display (derivative display) of the finalized decorative symbol may be made. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed, the effect control board 12 side autonomously without the effect control command from the main board 11 It is possible to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol on the final display and to fix the variable display result. After such effect control, etc., the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing when the attacker is open. On the other hand, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the effect process flag is initialized. Update to the value "0".

  The process for creating an attacker at step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "4." In the attack process opening time, the CPU 120 for effect control sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the screen of the image display device 5 And outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 and outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 It controls various rendering operations during a predetermined period in which the special winning opening door as an attacker is in an open state, such as turning on, turning off, or blinking a decorative LED. For example, in response to the hit end designation command from the main substrate 11 being received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in the attack process open time attack process.

  The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the screen of the image display device 5 or Output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and output a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 or decoration The various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LED, is executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S170 of FIG. 13 as the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, first, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command reception flag is in the on state (step S651). If the fluctuation pattern designation command reception flag is on (step S651; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designation command reception flag is cleared to the off state (step S652). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the value "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step S653).

  If the variation pattern specification command reception flag is not on (ie, no variation pattern specification command has been received) (step S651; No), the effect control CPU 120 is displaying a customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demonstration). It is determined whether or not it is (step S654). It should be noted that whether or not the customer waiting demo is being displayed may be determined based on, for example, a customer waiting demo displaying flag which is set to ON in accordance with execution of step S658 described later.

  If the customer waiting demo is not being displayed (step S654; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the customer waiting demo specification command reception flag is on (step S655). If the customer waiting demo specification command reception flag is on (that is, the customer waiting demonstration specification command is received) (step S655; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration specification command, It is determined whether an elapsed time of 30 seconds has passed (step S656). It should be noted that whether the elapsed time since the reception of the customer wait demo specification command has passed 30 seconds or not is determined, for example, by setting the customer wait demo specification command reception flag in the command analysis process (S54) shown in FIG. When the state is set, a value corresponding to 30 seconds may be set in a predetermined timer, and it may be determined whether the timer has timed out.

  If 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer wait demo specification command (step S656; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 turns off the customer wait demo specification command reception flag (step S657), and the image display device The predetermined customer waiting demonstration display is started at 5 (step S658). The customer waiting demo display is not limited to a mode of displaying a character string such as "during demo display" as shown in FIG. 25 (B), and is arbitrary. For example, a predetermined initial appearance (for example, Or a combination of symbols relating to a big hit such as “777”, a predetermined character may be displayed, or a logo type of a gaming machine maker may be displayed.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the customer waiting demo display is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demo specification command (corresponding to the time when the variable display is interrupted), It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the waiting for customer demonstration display may be started at the timing when 20 seconds or one minute has elapsed after the waiting for customer demonstration specification command is received. Also, for example, upon receiving the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started immediately.

  Subsequent to the process of step S658, or when the customer waiting demo is being displayed (step S654; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a menu switching operation has been performed (step S659). The menu switching operation is, for example, the pressing operation of the push button 31B that can be received during the customer waiting demo display, and the effect control CPU 120 performs the menu switching operation when the operation signal from the push button 31B is input. It is determined that there is. The operation unit capable of receiving the menu switching operation is optional, and is not limited to the push button 31B.

  If the menu switching operation has been performed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the menu mode in-progress flag is on (step S660). If the menu mode execution flag is off (step S660; No), the customer waiting demo display is erased and the menu display is started (the display on the image display device 5 is from FIG. 25 (B) to FIG. 25 (C1) Mode flag) is set to the on state (step S662). On the other hand, if the menu mode in-progress flag is on (step S660; Yes), the menu display is erased and the customer waiting demo display is restored (the display on the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. 25 (C1) to FIG. Switch to the mode as in B), and clear the menu mode in-progress flag to the off state (step S661).

  Following the process of step S662, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (step S663). Whether or not there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation, for example, it is determined whether or not an operation signal from the operation means (the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B as described above) is input. do it. If there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (step S663; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the volume adjustment mode selection flag to ON (step S664). After the execution of steps S653, S661, and S664, or in the case of No determination in steps S655, S656, S659, and S663, the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 13 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a result of the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol (step S321). As the process of step S 321, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variable display content such as the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the final stop symbol. As an example, in the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result, “non reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non probability change (big hit)”, “certain change (big hit)” is there.

  When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not in the reach state, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss" It becomes ". When the variable display content is "reach (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the finalized decorative symbol of the reach loss combination combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes "loss" . When the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)", the variable display result is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state is short. When the variable display content is "probable change (big hit)", the variable display result is "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the positive change state.

  When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. Decide on. The CPU 120 for effect control extracts numerical data indicating a random value for left fixed symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or random counter for effect, etc., and stores the left fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the left determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decoration pattern display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the right determined symbol determination random number value updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the determined decorative symbol which is displayed in the stop display in the "in" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 stops the same (matching) decorative symbols in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. Decide on. The CPU 120 for effect control extracts the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the left and right fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, etc., and stores the left and right fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to etc., among the decorative symbols, decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are the same and displayed in stop on the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same decide. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" on the screen of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative symbols is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, etc., the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", the CPU 120 for production control, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R The same (matching) decorative pattern is determined as the final stop pattern. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit determination symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the big hit finalized symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance, the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 L on the screen of the image display device 5, 5C and 5R are fixed and the symbol numbers displayed stopped are determined the same decorative pattern. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not a jackpot promotion promotion is performed, etc., a normal symbol (for example, an even number) It may be determined which of the decorative symbol to be shown and the definite variation symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the finalized decorative symbol. The jackpot promotion promotion effect is a jackpot game state or a jackpot game state after a combination of decorative patterns (non-probability jackpot combination) that reminds of a jackpot in the image display device 5 but does not evoke a definite change state is temporarily displayed once It is an effect of informing whether or not to become a definite change state at the end of.

  As a specific example, in the case where the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", one of a plurality of types of normal symbols is determined to be the finalized decorative symbol. When it is determined that the variable display content is "probable change (big hit)" and it is decided not to execute the big hit or middle promotion effect, a thing to be a definite decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of kinds of probability change symbols. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion is to be executed even if the variable display content is "certain (big hit)", a determined decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by preventing the jackpot promotion effect from being executed even though the definite variation symbols are equally drawn out and displayed as the finalized decorative symbol.

  As described above, whether or not to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the determination result of the determined special symbol in the special view game by determining the final stop symbol according to the variable display content by the process of step S321 It is possible to determine the variable display result of the decorative pattern related to the determination result of. Further, in the process of step S321, the small design corresponding to the finalized decorative design may be determined as the display result in the variable display of the small design.

  In the process of step S321, if the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", whether or not to execute a positive change promotion effect such as re-lottery production or a big hit during promotion effect It may be determined. In the re-lottery effect, the decoration pattern of the non-probability variation big hit combination consisting of the same normal pattern is displayed once during the variable display of the decoration pattern, making it temporarily difficult or unrecognizable that it is controlled to the probability changing state, It is possible to notify that the decorative pattern is controlled to be in the positive state by displaying the decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation symbol again by variably displaying (re-changing) the decoration symbol. In addition, after the decoration pattern is re-varied in the re-lottery effect, the decoration pattern of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed, and it may not be notified that it is controlled in the probability change state. If it is determined in the process of step S321 that the re-lottery effect is determined to be performed, the combination of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped may be determined before the re-lottery effect is performed.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol or the like in the process of step S321, a change effect setting process of executing execution setting of the pending display change effect or the active display change effect is executed (step S322). In the change presentation setting process, the execution setting of the suspension display change presentation is performed when the execution condition of the suspension display change presentation is satisfied based on the storage content of the suspension display data storage unit and the like. Further, in the change presentation setting process, the execution setting of the active display change presentation is performed when the execution condition of the active display change presentation is satisfied based on whether or not the variable display presentation of “pseudo series” is performed, etc. .

  Subsequent to the process of step S322, the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation promotion effect setting process (step S322A). The operation promotion effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Following the process of step S322A, the effect control pattern is determined to be any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of effect control patterns (special figure fluctuation effect control pattern) prepared corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command and the like as a usage pattern. set. In addition, the CPU for effect control 120 is any of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) prepared corresponding to the execution setting of the on-hold display change effect or the active display change effect by the change effect setting process of step S322. Select and set as usage pattern.

  Subsequent to the process of step S323, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command. (Step S324). Then, setting is made to start the change of the decorative symbol or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S325). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special pattern variation effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display region of the image display device 5 by the like.

  In addition, in the process of step S325, the variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the setting of the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. Thereby, in the small symbol display area 5V, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with each of the special drawing game using the first special drawing and the special drawing game using the second special drawing, Variable display of symbols can also be started. In the small symbol display area 5V, a small symbol (first small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization with the special drawing game using the first special drawing and the special drawing game using the second special drawing The small symbols (second small symbols) in which variable display is started synchronously may be separately disposed. As an example, the first small symbol variably displayed corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is disposed on the right side in the small symbol display area 5V, and corresponds to the special drawing game using the second special drawing The second small symbol variably displayed may be disposed on the left side of the small symbol display area 5V. In this way, by checking which of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is variably displayed, which of the special figure game using the first special figure and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed It is only necessary for the player or the like to specify whether it has been done. When the first small design and the second small design are arranged separately, the special drawing game using the first special drawing and the second special drawing based on, for example, the change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 and the like It is only necessary to determine which of the special drawing games of the special drawing games using is to start variable display. And, while the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started when the special figure game using the second special figure is started. It is sufficient to start variable display of small symbols. Thus, in the small symbol display area 5V, variable display of the effect image showing the first small symbol to be the first notification information image is performed in synchronization with the special drawing game using the first special drawing, and the display result is derived. The variable display of the effect image indicating the second small symbol serving as the second notification information image may be performed in synchronization with the special view game using the second special view, and the display result may be derived.

  After executing the processing of step S325, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, and the like corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting for updating is performed (step S326). For example, when the special drawing game using the first special drawing is executed (started), the display area (display area at the left end) corresponding to the holding number "1" is erased in the first hold display unit 5HR. While (digesting), the first hold display in the display area corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. On the other hand, when the special drawing game using the second special drawing is executed (started), the display area (display area at the right end) corresponding to the holding number “1” is erased in the second hold display unit 5HL. While (digesting), the second hold display in the display region corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is shifted (shifted) one by one to the right. Further, in the process of step S326, setting for updating the active display in the active display unit AHA is also performed. For example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the first hold display unit 5HR, the active display unit is similar to the active display similar to the erased (digested) first hold display. Start at AHA. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the second hold display unit 5HL, the active display similar to the erased (digested) second hold display is displayed actively Start with section AHA. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S 327), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step S322 in FIG. In the change presentation setting process shown in FIG. 29A, first, the storage content in the hold display data storage unit is updated (step S501). That is, in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative design, the storage data in the storage area of the holding number "1" is erased in the holding display data storage unit, and the storage area lower than the holding number "1" The storage data in (storage areas of pending numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry.

  Subsequent to the process of step S501, it is determined whether or not the on-hold display change timing, which is the execution timing of the on-hold display change effect, is reached (step S502). In the process of step S502, one or more change presentation timing patterns stored in the pending display data storage unit whose storage contents have been updated by the process of step S501 are matched with the pending numbers associated with the respective change presentation timing patterns It is determined whether or not the designation of the pending display change timing is included. For example, when any one of the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 to the change effect timing pattern TP3-7 shown in FIG. 17B is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number "3". Since the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number "3" is included, it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached. One of the change effect timing pattern TP2-1 to change effect timing pattern TP2-4, change effect timing pattern TP3-4, change effect timing pattern TP3-6, and change effect timing pattern TP3-7 is reserved in the display data storage unit When it is stored in association with the hold number "2", since the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number "2" is included, it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached. . Change effect timing pattern TP1-1, change effect timing pattern TP1-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-3, change effect timing pattern TP2-4, change effect timing pattern TP3-3, change effect timing pattern TP3-5, change effect When any one of the timing patterns TP3-7 is stored in the pending display data storage unit in association with the pending number “1”, including designation of the pending display change timing that matches the pending number “1”. Because of this, it is determined that the hold display change timing has come.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing comes (step S502; Yes), execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, the storage content of the pending display change pattern in the pending display data storage unit or the display mode in the pending display of the current state is specified to set whether or not to change the display mode. The setting of the later display mode or the like may be performed. Further, in the process of step S503, among the active display change effects, execution setting of a display color change effect may be performed to change the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern. In this case, the pending display change pattern indicated in the stored data erased from the pending display data storage unit in the process of step S501 is specified, and the setting of the display mode to be displayed after executing the active display change presentation, etc. It should be done. In the process of step S603 shown in FIG. 22, the setting for starting the display of the effect image showing the character (character for change effect) among the common effects on hold display change common effect and the active display change common effect is performed. It may not be performed in the process of step S503. On the other hand, the setting for executing the effect presentation in the on-hold display change presentation or the active display change presentation may be performed in the process of step S503.

  If it is determined in step S502 that it is not the pending display change timing (step S502; No), or after the process of step S503 is executed, “pseudo series” according to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is determined whether the variable display effect of "is performed (step S 504). At this time, when it is determined that the variable display effect of “pseudo chain” is executed (step S 504; Yes), the icon display change effect of whether to execute the icon display change effect of the active display change effect or not The presence or absence of is determined (step S505). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random number value for icon display change effect determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and determines the icon display change effect stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. The presence or absence of the icon display change presentation may be determined by referring to the table or the like. In the process of step S505, it is determined to be "no change effect effect" in which the icon display change effect is not executed or "in a change effect effect" in which the icon display change effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the variable display effect of "pseudo chain" is not executed (step S505; No), it is determined whether there is an execution of a display color change effect during active display (step S506) . At this time, when it is determined that the display color change presentation is performed (step S506; Yes), the change presentation setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display color change effect is not performed (step S506; No), the process proceeds to step S505, and the presence or absence of the icon display change effect is determined.

  After the process of step S505 is performed, it is determined whether the determination result is "no change effect production" (step S507). If the determination result is “no change effect production” (step S507; Yes), the change effect setting process is ended. If the determination result is “change effect is present” (step S507; No), the change effect setting process is terminated after determining any of a plurality of icon display change patterns prepared in advance (step S508). .

  FIG. 29B shows a determination example of the icon display change presentation. In the process of step S505 shown in FIG. 29A, for example, the presence or absence of an icon display change effect is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 29B. In the determination example shown in FIG. 29 (B), the determination ratio of “with change effect” is different according to the variable display content. For example, when the variable display content is "probable change (big hit)", the determination ratio of "no change production" is the lowest, and "non-probable change (big hit)", "reach (loss)", "non-reach (loss)" The determination ratio of "no change presentation" increases in the order of "." Therefore, when the icon display change effect is executed, there is a possibility that the probability change control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state, the possibility that the variable display result becomes the "big hit", and the decorative symbol The possibility of the variable display state of becoming the reach state increases.

  FIG. 30 shows a setting example of the icon display change pattern. Here, in response to the case where there is no pseudo continuous fluctuation in which the variable display of “pseudo run” is not performed and the case where the variable display effect of “pseudo run” is performed and the pseudo run fluctuation is performed three times, A plurality of prepared icon display change patterns are shown. In the case where there is no simulated continuous change, as shown in FIG. 30A, it is possible to execute an icon display change presentation by any of the icon display change pattern YAP1 to the icon display change pattern YAP3. In addition, even if it determines as "with change presentation" which performs icon display change presentation, an icon display change pattern may not be decided. In this case, after the active display change common effect is executed in the active display change effect, the active display change failure effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display does not change. Icon display change pattern YAP1 to icon display change pattern YAP3 change the icons displayed on the active display unit AHA into specific icons notifying of messages of "?", "Chance", and "extensive heat", respectively.

  In the case of three simulated continuous fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 30B, icon display change pattern YDP1-1 to icon display change pattern YDP1-4, icon display change pattern YDP2-1 to icon display change pattern YDP2- 4 and icon display change pattern YDP3-1 to icon display change pattern YDP3-4 It is possible to execute the icon display change presentation by any one of them. When the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed, the icon display change effect is executed corresponding to the first change and the pseudo continuous change of each time. Thus, active display change presentation can be performed a plurality of times until variable decorative display of decorative design is started and fixed decorative design as a display result is derived, and the display mode of active display can be changed. . When the change effect timing pattern to be changed during active display is determined in step S310 of the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 15, the display color change effect may be executed at the first change.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 30B, the icon notifying the message of “NEXT” is displayed only after the active display change effect is executed, only when the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed. It becomes a display mode of the active display. Furthermore, the icon for notifying the message of "NEXT" changes the active display due to the final change when the variable display effect of "pseudo run" is executed, such as the third simulated run change in the setting example shown in FIG. After the effect is executed, the display mode is not displayed as the display mode of the active display. That is, the icon notifying the message of "NEXT" is displayed after the active display change effect is executed during the variable display before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo continuous change) temporarily with the variable display effect of "pseudo run" A display mode that is included in the display mode of the active display that can be displayed, but is not displayed as the display mode of the active display after the active display change effect is performed during the variable display after the predetermined number of times of pseudo continuous change is performed Become.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the icons for notifying messages such as “?”, “Chance”, “extensive heat”, “NEXT”, etc. have active display change effects executed. While being included in the display mode of the active display to be displayed later, the special mode is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the hold display change effect is executed.

  FIG. 31 shows an example of determination of the icon display change pattern. In the process of step S508 shown in FIG. 29A, the CPU 120 for effect control extracts numerical value data indicating a random value for icon display change pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, etc. It is sufficient to determine one of the plurality of icon display change patterns by referring to an icon display change pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance.

  In the case where there is no pseudo link variation in which the variable display effect of “pseudo link” is not executed, a plurality of icons are displayed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 31 (A) by the processing of step S508 shown in FIG. Decide on one of the change patterns. On the other hand, in the case of three times of pseudo series fluctuation in which the pseudo series fluctuation is executed three times in the variable display effect of “pseudo series”, the process of step S508 shown in FIG. At one of the plurality of icon display change patterns, it is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the determination examples shown in FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B), the determinable icon display change pattern and the determination ratio are different according to the variable display content. For example, in the determination example shown in FIG. 31A, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", the icon display change pattern YAP3 can be determined while the variable display is When the content is "non-reach (loss)" or "reach (loss)", the icon display change pattern YAP3 can not be determined. In addition, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", one of the icon display change pattern YAP1 to the icon display change pattern YAP3 is determined at a predetermined ratio, but variable When the display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "reach (loss)", the icon display change pattern becomes "none" at a predetermined ratio.

  With such a setting, when there is no simulated continuous change, the active display change effect is executed, and the icon display change pattern YAP3 displays a display mode in which a message of "superheat" is displayed as a display mode after change. It is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” in the current variable display corresponding to the active display. In addition, in the case where there is no pseudo continuous change, when the active display change effect is executed and the icon display change pattern corresponds to "none", the active change display mode does not change and the active change change effect is displayed. In the corresponding current variable display, it is determined that the variable display result is not a "big hit" but a "loss".

  In addition, according to the display mode of the active display displayed after active display change production is performed, a variable display result becomes "big hit" or "miss" in the current variable display corresponding to the active display. If is determined, there is a risk that the game interest until the end of the variable display may decline. Therefore, for example, even when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "reach (loss)", the icon display change pattern YAP3 may be set to be determined at a predetermined ratio. In this case, the variable display content may be set to be determined as the icon display change pattern YAP3 at a sufficiently low rate as compared to the case of “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”. Also, for example, even when the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", the icon display change pattern may be set to be "none" at a predetermined rate. In this case, the icon display change pattern is determined to be "none" at a sufficiently low rate as compared to the case where the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "reach (loss)" It is also good.

  The rate at which the icon display change pattern is determined to be "none" in the process of step S508 shown in FIG. 29A is higher than the rate determined to be "no display change" in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. It is set to be low. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the process of step S307, "display change" is determined at a ratio of 20/100 when the winning determination result is "general when lost". That is, in this case, "no display change" is determined at a rate of 80/100. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 31A, in the process of step S508, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the icon display change pattern is "none" at a rate of 5/100. It is determined. If "no display change" is determined in step S307, the pending change cassette effect is executed. If the icon display change pattern is determined as "none" in step S508, the active change cassette effect is executed. Ru. With such a setting, the rate at which the active change display effect does not change after the active display change effect is performed The ratio at which the active change change effect is performed is a change in the display mode of the hold display after the pending display change effect is performed Not hold change will be lower than the rate at which the gasse effect is performed. Therefore, the active display change success effect to be the second success effect in the active display change effect may be executed at a rate higher than the ratio at which the pending display change success effect to be the first success effect is performed in the on-hold display change effect. it can.

  Of the plurality of change effect timing patterns shown in FIG. 17B, change effect timing pattern TP0-1, change effect timing pattern TP1-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-4, When it is determined to the change presentation timing pattern TP3-2, the change presentation timing pattern TP3-5, and the change presentation timing pattern TP3-6, the hold display change timing is set during the active display, and the display color is displayed as the display mode of the active display. An active display change effect that is a display color change effect to be changed to a specific color is executed. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 15, the determination ratio of the change presentation timing pattern which becomes the suspension display change timing during the active display is lower than the determination ratio of the change presentation timing pattern which does not become the suspension change timing during the active display. Any of the change presentation timing patterns may be determined using the determination table set to be In the process of step S506 shown in FIG. 29A, when it is determined that the display color change presentation is performed during the active display, the process does not proceed to the process of step S505, and the icon display change presentation is limited. Therefore, there is a possibility that the icon display change presentation may be difficult to be performed if the ratio of the display color change presentation is increased during the active display. Therefore, the rate at which the icon display change presentation is performed may be increased by decreasing the determination ratio of the change presentation timing pattern at which the pending display change timing occurs during the active display.

  When it is determined in step S506 shown in FIG. 29A that the display color change effect is being executed during active display, the change effect setting process is ended without proceeding to the process of step S505, thereby the icon being displayed. It limits so that a display change production is not performed. In this way, it is possible to prevent game effects from being complicated by preventing the complex display from being performed so that the active display change effect that is the display color change effect and the active display change effect that is the icon display change effect are not performed redundantly. Can be improved.

  FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S322A of FIG. 28 as the operation promotion effect setting process. In the operation promotion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a variable display result and a fluctuation pattern (step S801). The variable display result can be specified by the prize determination result command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main base 11.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern identified in step S801 involves execution of super reach (step S802). If it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step S802; Yes), the CPU for effect control 120 sets the operation promotion effect execution determination flag to the on state (step S803). The flag is cleared to the off state in the process of step S858 described later (FIG. 34).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in effect (step S804). For example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the cut-in effect execution determination random number and determines the type of cut-in effect using the cut-in effect type determination table (see FIG. 32B). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control extracts numeric data indicating a random number value for determination of cut-in effect type updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, etc. The type of the cut-in effect may be determined by referring to the type determination table or the like.

  The cut-in effect is an effect inserted when the player performs a button operation (for example, the operation of the push button 31B) in the effective period of the button operation in the super reach effect, and for example, a moving image or character to which an effect is applied It is an effect that the scene where is appeared is inserted. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32B, cut-in effects A and cut-in effects B having different modes are prepared as cut-in effects. In the effective period of the button operation, an operation prompting prompting operation of the push button 31B is made (an operation prompting image P as shown in FIG. 35 (C) is displayed on the image display device 5). After execution of step S804 or when it is not the super reach change pattern (step S802; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation promotion effect setting process.

  In the cut-in effect type determination table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 32B, “cut-in effect A” is determined with a probability of 20% when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, “cut-in effect B” Is configured to be determined with an 80% probability. Further, in the case where the variation pattern is a super reach loss, “cut in effect A” is determined with a probability of 70%, and “cut in effect B” is determined with a probability of 30%. Since the determination probability is set in this manner, “cut-in effect B” is more easily performed when a super reach in the variable display occurs than in the case of a super reach loss. In addition, the cut-in effect is not executed for the case of normal reach loss or non-reach end. That is, there is a high probability that the cut-in effect will be a big hit than the case where the cut-in effect is not executed, and if the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect B will be a big hit than the cut-in effect A It is likely to be In addition, the determination ratio shown to FIG. 32 (B) is an example to the last, and can be changed suitably. For example, in the case of a super reach loss, "cut-in effect A" and "cut-in effect B" may be performed with the same probability. In addition, two or more types of cut-in effects may be prepared, or one type.

  FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S172 of FIG. 13 as the variable display effect processing. In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 33, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, decremented by 1), and the end code is read out from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is a hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The pending display change effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S323 shown in FIG. If it is the on-hold display change effect period (step S 342; Yes), control for executing the on-hold display change effect is performed (step S 343). In the process of step S343, various commands generated based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on or off or off. Alternatively, the on-hold display change presentation may be performed by a predetermined presentation device by combining some or all of them.

  Note that the effect image showing the character (character for change effect) in the on-hold display change common effect among the on-hold display change effects is started to be displayed by executing the process of step S603 shown in FIG. By performing the processing of S 607 and S 609, display control is performed during variable display or when symbol determination is performed, and the display is ended by executing the processing of step S 605. Therefore, in the process of step S343, display control regarding the change effect character may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the pending display change effect is executed, the display control of the character for change effect is performed in the process of step S343, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect in the process of step S343. Display control of the character may not be performed.

  When it is determined in step S342 that the on hold display change effect period is not determined (step S342; No), or after the processing in step S343 is performed, it is an active display change effect period for executing active display change effect. It is determined whether or not (step S344). The active display change presentation period may be determined in advance, for example, in the presentation control pattern (display change presentation control pattern) determined in the process of step S323 shown in FIG. If it is the active display change effect period (step S344; Yes), control for executing the active display change effect is performed (step S345). The on-hold display change presentation and the active display change presentation may be performed by performing common presentation control. In this case, instead of the processing in steps S342 to S345, it is determined whether or not it is a display change effect period common to the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, and it is determined that it is a display change effect period. The control for executing the on-hold display change presentation or the active display change presentation may be performed according to the display change presentation control pattern.

  Further, the effect image indicating the character (character for change effect) in the active display change common effect among the active display change effects is started to be displayed by execution of the processing of step S603 shown in FIG. By performing the processing of S 607 and S 609, display control is performed during variable display or when symbol determination is performed, and the display is ended by executing the processing of step S 605. Therefore, in the process of step S345, display control regarding the character for change presentation may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the active display change effect is executed, the display control of the character for change effect is performed in the process of step S345, and in the variable display in which the effect effect is not performed, the character for change effect in step S345. The display control of may not be performed.

  When it is determined in step S344 that it is not an active display change effect period (step S344; No), or after the processing in step S345, whether it is a reach effect period for executing reach effect or not It determines (step S346). The reach effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is a reach effect period (step S346; Yes), control for executing reach effect is performed (step S347).

  If it is determined in step S346 that it is not a reach effect period (step S346; No) or after the process of step S347 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the operation promotion effect execution determination flag is in the on state It is determined whether or not it is (step S347A). The operation promotion effect execution determination flag is set to the on state in the process of step S803 described above, and is cleared to the off state in the process of step S858 described later. When the operation promotion effect execution determination flag is on (step S347A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation promotion effect process (step S347B). The operation promotion effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. After execution of the operation promotion effect process, or when the operation promotion effect execution determination flag is off (step S347A; No), for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, etc. Control for executing an effect in the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed (step S348).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S349). At this time, if the symbol determination command is not received (step S349; No), the variable display effect processing is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time elapses, when the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol determination command, a predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol determination command normally. You may

  When the symbol determination command is received in step S 349 (step S 349; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (decided decorative symbol) to be the display result (step S350). In addition, in the process of step S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the small symbol variation end control is performed to end the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V. In this small symbol variation end control, the small symbol corresponding to the determined decorative symbol determined in the process of step S 321 shown in FIG. 28 is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5 V as the display result in the variable symbol display of small symbols. Just do it. Thus, in the small symbol display area 5V, the finalized decorative symbol that is the display result in the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second symbol When derived and variable display ends, variable display of a small symbol can also be ended. At this time, a fixed time predetermined as the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S 351). In addition, after the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "3" which is a value corresponding to the processing for waiting for a special figure (step S352), the processing for rendering under variable display is ended.

  For example, in the process of step S348 shown in FIG. 33, display control in the small symbol display area 5V is performed so that the small symbol is always variably displayed in a constant variation mode regardless of the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol. Just do it. For example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, or when the variable display effect such as "pseudo series" is executed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C for "left", "middle" and "right" Even when the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in a part or all of 5R, the small symbol is not displayed temporarily in the small symbol display area 5V, and the variable display is continuously changed at a constant speed. Should be done.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation promotion effect process executed in step S347B of FIG. In the operation promotion effect process, first, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the operation promotion display is in progress (step S851). For example, whether or not the operation prompting display is being performed is set to the on state with the execution of the processing of step S853 described later, and is cleared to the off state with the execution of the processing of step S855 or S857 described later. It may be determined whether the middle flag is on.

  When the operation promotion display is not being performed (step S851; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the execution start timing of the operation promotion display (step S852). When it is the execution start timing of the operation promotion display (step S852; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the operation promotion image P as shown in FIG. Start) (step S853). The timing of execution and end of the operation promotion display is described in a process table for operation promotion effect.

  On the other hand, when the operation promotion display is being performed (step S851; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the operation promotion display (step S854). If it is the end timing of the operation prompting display (Step S854; Yes), the operation prompting image P is deleted (the operation prompting display is ended), and a cut-in no effect is executed (Step S855). That is, a predetermined reach effect is performed without executing the cut-in effect determined in step S804.

  In step S854, when it is the end timing of the operation promotion display (step S854; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the operation of the push button 31B (step S856). If there is an operation on the push button 31B (step S854; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation promotion display, and executes a cut-in presence effect (step S857). That is, the cut-in effect A or B determined in step S804 is executed, and a predetermined reach effect is executed.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S855 or S857, the CPU for effect control 120 clears the operation promotion effect execution determination flag to the off state (step S858). After execution of step S858, or when it is determined No in step S852 or S856, the operation promotion effect process ends.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening and a start winning combination such as a first start winning or a second start winning occurs The variable display of the special symbol is started in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the start condition which allows the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. Ru. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol or the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

  When the first starting condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the first starting winning by the gaming ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, the processing of steps S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 is executed. , And the number of first special view pending storage is incremented by one. When the second start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening, the processing of steps S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 is executed. , And the second special view reserve storage number is incremented by one. At this time, numerical data representing a random number value MR1 for special image display result determination, a random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are extracted by the process of step S209. Then, by executing the winning random number value determination process as shown in FIG. 5 in step S212, it determines the variable display content such as whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the winning determination result The determination result command at the time of winning showing the key is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  In step S301 shown in FIG. 15, it is determined whether or not there has been reception of an effect control command transmitted at the time of the start winning, including the determination result command at the time of winning. Then, when it is determined that the command is received, the presence or absence and the type of the on-hold display change effect are determined by the process of step S304 based on the determination result at the time of winning specified in the process of step S302. At this time, if it is determined to execute the on-hold display change effect, the presence or absence of the display change is determined by the process of step S307. When it is determined that there is a display change, the pending display change pattern is determined by the process of step S309, and when it is determined that there is no display change, the process of step S310 is not performed but the change effect is produced by the process of step S310. Timing patterns are determined. The pending display change pattern and the determination result of the change presentation timing pattern are stored in the pending display data storage unit in association with the pending number by the process of step S311.

  In step S602 shown in FIG. 22, it is determined based on the stored contents in the pending display data storage unit whether or not there is a setting for executing a change presentation such as a pending display change presentation. When it is determined that the setting is made, the display start control of step S603 causes the display of the effect image indicating the character (character for change effect) to be started. The effect image indicating the change effect character can be continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is determined in step S604 that the display end timing is reached. When each variable display is started, it is determined that the change start command has been received in step S606, so that the control start setting in step S607 is performed, and the display mode of the effect image showing the change effect character is decorative It becomes an action mode corresponding to during variable display of symbols (during variation). On the other hand, when the display result in each variable display is derived, it is determined in step S608 that the symbol determination command has been received, whereby the control start setting in step S609 is performed, and the character for change effect is indicated. The display mode of the effect image is a stationary mode corresponding to the final display of the decorative pattern. Thus, in the period in which the display result of the effect image indicating the decorative design to be the identification information image is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character can be set as the stationary mode.

  When variable display of a special drawing game or a decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are executed by executing the fluctuation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. The variation pattern designation command which determines any of the above and indicates the determined variation pattern can be transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  In step S321 shown in FIG. 28, the final stop symbol etc. is determined based on the fluctuation pattern etc. indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. Processing is performed. In the change presentation setting process, when it is determined in step S502 that the pending display change timing is reached, execution setting of the pending display change presentation is performed in step S503. In addition, the execution setting of the active display change presentation which becomes a display color change presentation may also be performed in step S503. If it is determined in step S504 that the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is performed, or the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is not executed, but there is no execution of the display color change effect during active display in step S506 If it is determined that there is no icon display change effect at step S506. When executing the icon display change effect, the icon display change pattern is determined in step S508.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 35, an example in the case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described. In FIG. 35, in the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 32A, it is determined that it is a super reach change pattern (step S802; Yes), and the type of cut-in effect is determined (step S804) An example is shown.

  When the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is executed and the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 35 (A), a predetermined reach effect in normal reach is executed, and thereafter, FIG. 35 (B) By displaying the development notification image ("Super reach!" In the illustrated example) as shown in Fig. 6 on the image display device 5, notification of the development to the super reach is performed. When the adjustment operation is performed by the player during the fluctuation, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right end of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 35B (corresponding to step S710).

  Following such a development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during execution of reach production in the super reach as shown in FIG. 35C (start of operation promotion display. Corresponds to step S853 shown in FIG. 34. ). When the push button 31B is operated, a predetermined cut-in effect (cut-in effect A or B shown in FIG. 32B) is executed as shown in FIG. This corresponds to the case where step S858 is executed after the Yes determination in step S856). When the operation by the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed (corresponding to the case where step S855 is executed after the Yes determination in step S854 of FIG. 34) . After that, as shown in FIG. 35E, for example, the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 35B to 35D, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 5 until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position not overlapping the development notification image and the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, as shown in FIG. 35E, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to step S712) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  FIG. 36 shows an example of execution of the on-hold display change presentation when the change presentation timing pattern TP3-1 is determined by the process of step S310 shown in FIG. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 36A, the hold display corresponding to the hold numbers “1” to “4” is performed in the second hold display unit 5HL, and the current variable display is performed in the active display unit AHA. The corresponding active display is being performed. In the small symbol display area 5V, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. Of the pending display in the second pending display unit 5HL, the pending display of the pending number “3” (third from the right end) is “type of the pending display change effect is“ with change effect ”in the process of step S304 shown in (1) It shall be determined. As shown in FIG. 17B, when the hold number is “3”, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 is the hold display change timing. Corresponding to the determination result in the process of step S310, in the process of step S311, the data indicating the change presentation timing pattern TP3-1 is stored in the hold display data storage unit together with the data indicating the determination result of the hold display change pattern Ru.

  In the character display process for change effect shown in FIG. 22, when it is determined in step S601 that the character is not being displayed, it is determined in step S602 whether or not there is a setting for executing the change effect. At this time, the process of step S603 is executed by determining that there is a setting for executing the change effect based on the storage content of the pending display data storage unit. As a result, for example, an effect image indicating the character CH1 as shown in FIG. 36A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 36B, for example, the on-hold display change common effect including the effect on which the effect image of the character CH1 acts on the on-hold display of the on-hold number “3” is executed. Subsequently, the suspension display change presentation is performed according to the presence or absence of the display change and the determination result of the suspension display change pattern. For example, in the case where “display change is determined” in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 15 and the pending display change pattern ZHP1-1 is determined in the process of step S309, FIG. 36 (C1) As shown in, as the display mode of the hold display, the hold display change success effect is executed in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors. On the other hand, when "no display change" is determined in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 15, the display mode of the hold display does not change as shown in FIG. 36 (C2). The presentation (hold change change presentation) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (C1) and FIG. 36 (C2), even when a finalized decorative pattern to be displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns is derived, the display end timing in the process of step S604 shown in FIG. The effect image indicating the character CH1 is continuously displayed until it is determined that At this time, when it is determined that the symbol determination command has been received in the process of step S608, the process of step S609 is performed. As a result, in the period in which the finalized decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the stationary mode. Subsequently, when variable display such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol is started based on the number of pending storage being other than “0”, it is assumed that the variation start command has been received in the process of step S606 shown in FIG. By being determined, the process of step S607 is performed. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes an action mode, triggered by the reception of the change start command as the display control information that can specify that the variable display is started.

  FIG. 37 shows an example of execution of a display color change effect and an icon display change effect during active display. In this execution example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 37 (A) and the display of the effect image showing the character CH1 are performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the effect image of the character CH1 An active display change common effect is executed including an action effect that acts on the active display in the active display unit AHA. The active display change common effect shown in FIG. 37 (B) differs in that the action target is the hold display or the active display, but includes an action effect such that the effect image of the character CH1 acts. In addition, it is an effect aspect in common with the hold display change common effect shown in FIG. 36 (B). In the case where the pending display change pattern ZHP1-1 is determined in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15 corresponding to the active display and the change presentation timing pattern TP0-1 is determined in the process of step S310. As shown in FIG. 37 (C1), an active display change success representation is performed in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors as the display mode of the active display. On the other hand, in the case where “with change effect” is determined in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. 29A and the icon display change pattern YAP2 is determined in the process of step S508, FIG. As shown in C2), the active display change success staging is performed in which the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which a message of "chance" is notified.

  After the active display change success effect is executed, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, it is determined in the process of step S604 shown in FIG. Processing is performed. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C1) and FIG. 37 (C2), when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the display of the effect image showing the character CH1 can be ended.

  FIG. 38 shows an example of effect execution in which a plurality of pending display change effects are executed corresponding to 1 pending display. FIG. 39 shows the execution timing of each effect shown in FIG. In the example of effect execution shown in FIG. 38, of the hold display in second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display change pattern ZHP12 is determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. And the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 is determined by the process of step S310. As shown in FIG. 17B, the change effect timing pattern TP3-3 is the hold display change timing when the hold number "3" and the hold number "1". Based on the pending display change pattern and the determination result of the change presentation timing pattern, it is determined by the process of step S602 shown in FIG. 22 that there is a setting for executing the change presentation. By performing the display start control of step S603 according to the determination result, an effect image indicating the character CH1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  When variable display of decorative symbols or small symbols as shown in FIG. 38A is started at timing T01 shown in FIG. 39, it is determined that the variation start command has been received by the processing of step S606 shown in FIG. And the process of step S 607 is performed. Thus, in response to the reception of the change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes an action mode. Further, in the process of step S502 shown in FIG. 29A, it is determined that it is the pending display change timing. Therefore, the on-hold display change effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative design based on the execution setting in the process of step S503.

  For example, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03 shown in FIG. 39, it is determined in the process of step S342 shown in FIG. 33 that it is a pending display change presentation period, and the process of step S343 is executed. As a result, the on-hold display change common effect as shown in FIG. 38 (B) can be executed. After the effect shown in FIG. 38 (B) is executed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold number “3” changes to a display mode showing a “secret” message as shown in FIG. 38 (C). Do. When the timing T04 shown in FIG. 39 is reached, as shown in FIG. 38D, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the final display is performed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby the variable display is displayed. finish. At this time, it is determined in the process of step S608 shown in FIG. 22 that the symbol determination command has been received, and the process of step S609 is executed. Thereby, when the display result of the variable display in the decorative symbol or the small symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the stop mode.

  Following the end of the variable display as shown in FIG. 38D, at timing T05 shown in FIG. 39, variable display of a decorative symbol or a small symbol as shown in FIG. 38E is started. At this time, in the pending display data storage unit, the storage data indicating the pending display change pattern ZHP12 and the change presentation timing pattern TP3-3 is moved (shifted) by the process of step S501 shown in FIG. It is stored in association with "2". Since the change presentation timing pattern TP3-3 does not include the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number "2," it is determined in step S502 that it is not the hold display change timing. Therefore, the hold display change presentation is not performed during the current variable display. When variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 38E is started, it is determined by the processing of step S606 shown in FIG. 22 that the variation start command has been received, and the processing of step S607 is By being executed, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes an action mode.

  After variable display as shown in FIG. 38 (E) is started, at timing T06 shown in FIG. 39, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the variable display ends when the small symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the stationary mode. Subsequently, at timing T07 shown in FIG. 39, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols as shown in FIG. 38 (G) is started. At this time, in response to the reception of the change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes an action mode. Further, in the pending display data storage unit, the storage data indicating the pending display change pattern ZHP12 and the change presentation timing pattern TP3-3 is moved (shifted) by the process of step S501 shown in FIG. It is stored in association with “1”. Since the change presentation timing pattern TP3-3 includes the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number "1", it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing is reached. Therefore, the on-hold display change effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative design based on the execution setting in the process of step S503.

  For example, in the period from the timing T08 to the timing T09 shown in FIG. 39, the on-hold display change effect period is set, and the on-hold display change common effect as shown in FIG. 38 (H) is executed. After such a pending display change common effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 38 (I), the pending display in which the display color changes to green among the specific colors as the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending number "1". A change success presentation is performed. When the timing T10 shown in FIG. 39 is reached, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, whereby the variable display is ended. At this time, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the stationary mode.

  FIG. 40 shows an example of execution of the on-hold display change presentation and the active display change presentation (icon display change presentation) in the case of three pseudo continuous fluctuation. FIG. 41 shows the execution timing of each effect shown in FIG. When variable display of a decorative symbol or a small symbol as shown in FIG. 40A is started at timing T11 shown in FIG. 41, the active display portion AHA displays an active display in which the display color is green among specific colors. Shall be performed. In response to the active display, the pending display change pattern ZHP2-3 or the pending display change pattern ZHP3-1 is determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 15, and the pending display change during the active display is performed by the process of step S310. A change presentation timing pattern including timing is determined. When variable display corresponding to the active display shown in FIG. 40A is started, storage data corresponding to hold number “1” in the hold display data storage unit by the process of step S501 shown in FIG. Are eliminated (digested). At this time, it is determined in step S502 that it is the pending display change timing during active display in accordance with the change presentation timing pattern indicated in the stored data erased at this time. Further, based on the fact that the process of step S504 determines that there is an execution of the variable display effect of “pseudo series”, the process of step S505 determines “with change effect” and the process of step S508 in FIG. The icon display change pattern YDP2-4 shown in (B) is determined.

  At timing T11 shown in FIG. 41, it is determined by the process of step S606 shown in FIG. 22 that the fluctuation start command has been received, and the process of step S607 is executed. Thus, in response to the reception of the change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes an action mode. Thereafter, for example, in the period from timing T12 to timing T13 shown in FIG. 41, it is determined in the process of step S344 shown in FIG. 33 that it is the active display change effect period, and the process of step S345 is executed. As a result, an active display change common effect as shown in FIG. 40 (B) can be executed. The active display change common effect is included in the display color change effect, and as shown in FIG. 40C, the display color changes to red among the specific colors as the display mode of the active display. When the timing T14 shown in FIG. 41 is reached, the decorative symbol forming the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed temporarily, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. At this time, the symbol determination command is not transmitted from the main substrate 11. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 5V, variable display of small symbols is continuously performed in a constant speed variation mode, and the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 is maintained as the action mode.

  Following the temporary stop in the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 40C, at timing T15 shown in FIG. 41, the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed as shown in FIG. A pseudo continuous variation is performed. In a period from timing T16 to timing T17 shown in FIG. 41, an active display change effect period is set according to the icon display change pattern YDP2-4, and the active display change effect is executed. The active display change effect is executed as an icon change effect, and as shown in FIG. 40E, the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which a message of "NEXT" is notified. When the timing T18 shown in FIG. 41 is reached, the decorative symbol forming the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed temporarily, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. At this time, variable display of the small symbols is continuously performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 is maintained as the action mode.

  Following the temporary stop in the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 40 (E), at timing T 19 shown in FIG. 41, the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed as shown in FIG. A pseudo continuous variation is performed. In a period from timing T20 to timing T21 shown in FIG. 41, an active display change effect period is set according to the icon display change pattern YDP2-4, and the active display change effect is executed. The active display change effect is executed as an icon change effect, and as shown in FIG. 40G, the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which a message of "chance" is notified. When the timing T22 shown in FIG. 41 is reached, the decorative symbol forming the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed temporarily, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. At this time, variable display of the small symbols is continuously performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 is maintained as the action mode.

  At the timing T23 shown in FIG. 41, following the temporary stop in the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 40 (G), the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed as shown in FIG. 40 (H) and the third time A pseudo continuous variation is performed. In a period from timing T24 to timing T25 shown in FIG. 41, an active display change effect period is set according to the icon display change pattern YDP2-4, and the active display change effect is executed. The active display change effect is executed as an icon change effect, and as shown in FIG. 40I, the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which a message of "superheat" is notified. At timing T26 shown in FIG. 41, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and reach is established. At this time, it is determined in the process of step S604 shown in FIG. 22 that the display end timing is reached, and the process of step S605 is executed to end the display of the effect image showing the character CH1 to be the change presentation character. Thereafter, reach effects in normal reach and super reach are executed, and when timing T 27 shown in FIG. 41 is reached, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), the decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol It may be done. At this time, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the small symbols are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (D), FIG. 38 (F) and FIG. 38 (I), the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol and small symbol are variable. In the period in which the display result in the display is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 to be the change effect character is the static mode. By setting the display layer as shown in FIG. 23B, the effect image showing the character CH1 can be arranged at the overlapping position on the front side with respect to the player as compared to the effect image showing the decorative pattern. It is displayed prior to the effect image shown. By setting the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 arranged at a position overlapping on the front side of the effect image showing such a decorative pattern as the stationary mode, the player can perform display in the variable display of the decorative pattern It is possible to clearly recognize that the result has been derived and to prevent misidentification of the displayed result.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and can be shown in the above-mentioned embodiment so that at least one problem in the prior art can be solved. It may have a part of the configuration.

  In the above embodiment, on the screen of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are provided to perform variable display of decorative symbols. It has been described that the small symbol display area 5V is provided and variable display of the small symbol is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in pachinko gaming machine 1 in which small symbol display area 5V is not provided, a decorative symbol is displayed by displaying an effect image showing the decorative symbol on the screen of image display device 5 The variable display of may be executable. Even in this case, the effect image indicating the character or the like to be the specific effect image can be arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol to be the identification information image, and the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is In the derived period, the display mode of the specific effect image displayed at the overlapping position on the front side with respect to the effect image indicating the decorative pattern may be set as the stationary mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, instead of variably displaying the effect image showing the decorative pattern, or by displaying the effect image prepared in advance with such variable display, it corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game When the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is derived, the animation display of the effect image is interrupted or paused, and the variable display is performed by the display capable of recognizing the display result of the variable display. May be derived separately from the display result. In this manner, it is possible to execute an associated display that derives the display result in relation to the determination result of whether or not to control to the player's advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, for example. When it is possible to arrange the specific effect image at the overlapping position, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode in a period in which the display result in the related display is derived.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the advance notice effect of "hold display change" or the notice effect of "active display change" is executed, a character used in the hold display change effect or the active display change effect is used as the specific effect image. The effect image to be shown has been described as being capable of being displayed over multiple variable displays. On the other hand, for example, together with the pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change", different pre-reading notice effects different from this can be simultaneously executed over a plurality of variable displays, and characters etc. used in part or all of pre-reading notice effect The effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern to be the identification information image. In this case, among the effect images used in the preview advance notice effect, whether or not the effect image being arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the identification information image as the specific effect image is derived whether the display result is Depending on whether the display period is an action mode or a stationary mode, the display mode may be different depending on whether it is a period.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the specific effect image, it has been described that the effect image indicating the character used in the on-hold display change effect or the active display change effect is displayed. On the other hand, as a specific effect image, display is started during variable display in which variable display of decorative design is performed or before the start of variable display, and is continuously displayed even in a period in which the display result in variable display is derived. Any effect image may be used. For example, in response to a period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a definite variation state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), an effect image showing special characters and the like over multiple variable displays is a decorative symbol , And may be displayed in an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating. Alternatively, in response to a period in which the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays indicates an ornament pattern Alternatively, they may be displayed in an overlapping position on the front side. In this manner, as the specific effect image, the effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays can be arranged so that it can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image. In the period during which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode.

  The effect image indicating the character may be, for example, an effect image indicating a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other arbitrary figure. The display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the action mode by reproducing and displaying the moving image as the specific effect image during the variable display in which the variable design of the decorative design and the like is executed. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the still mode by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the moving image.

  When the effect image indicating the decorative pattern of 1 becomes the identification information image, the effect image to be the specific effect image is disposed at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing a portion of the decorative pattern of 1 It may be what is arrange | positioned, and may be arrange | positioned in the overlapping position ahead of the rendering image which shows the whole of 1 decoration pattern. When the effect image showing a plurality of decorative designs is an identification information image, the effect image to be a specific effect image has an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing a part of the plurality of decorative designs. It may be arrange | positioned, and may be arrange | positioned in the overlapping position on the front side rather than the presentation image which shows all the decoration patterns.

  The type and part of the identification information image in which the effect image to be the specific effect image can be arranged on the front side may be different according to at least one of the gaming state and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state (low probability low base state), regardless of whether the decorative symbol is a normal symbol or a definite variation symbol, the front side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol The effect image to be the specific effect image can be arranged at the overlapping position. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a definite variation state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), overlapping is more forward than the effect image showing the normal symbol among the plurality of decorative symbols While making it possible to arrange the effect image to be the specific effect image at the position, the effect image to be the specific effect image is not arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the probable symbol among the plural decorative patterns May be In this case, when the gaming state is a definite change state, it is prevented that the player's attention to the continuation of the positive change state being derived by the big hit combination and the definite change image is hindered by the display of the specific effect image. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, for example, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal effect mode, regardless of the symbol number of the decorative symbol, the effect image to be the specific effect image at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol It is possible to arrange. On the other hand, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode over a plurality of variable displays, for example, the decorative symbol with a specific symbol number associated with a specific person is shown The effect image to be the specific effect image may not be disposed at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image. As described above, the specific effect image may be disposed at any overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the display mode is made to be the stationary mode for all of the effect images to be the specific effect images in the period in which the display result in the variable display such as the decorative symbol to be the identification information image is derived. On the other hand, what is necessary is just a thing which can make a display mode a still mode about a part of specific effect image arrange | positioned in the overlapping position ahead of the effect image of the decorative symbol used as an identification information image at least.

  In the above embodiment, the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image in the period in which the display result in the variable display such as the decorative pattern is derived It demonstrated as what makes the display aspect of the production | presentation pattern which becomes the stationary aspect. On the other hand, when there is an effect image (rear arrangement image) disposed behind the effect image indicating the decorative design to be the identification information image, in the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, The rear arrangement image may be displayed in the same display mode as during variable display in which variable display and the like are performed. For example, a background image display layer is provided as a display layer to which a value larger than the Z value of the effect image drawn on the decorative symbol display layer shown in FIG. 23B is assigned to lower the display priority. It is also good. In the background image layer, an effect image to be a background image is drawn. In the background image display layer, the Z value may be set so as to be disposed at the rearmost side with respect to the player. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display of the effect image serving as the background image disposed at the overlapping position or the non-overlapping position behind the effect image showing the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image. The mode may be the same as the display mode during variable display. As a result, while the effect image which may cause a false recognition in the display result as in the specific effect image is set as a stationary mode, the effect image which does not cause a false recognition of the display result as in the background image is the same display as during variable display By setting the aspect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort with respect to the display of the effect image.

  In the above embodiment, during the variable display in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed, the display mode of the effect image to be the specific effect image is the action mode, while the display result in the variable display is derived. It has been described that the display mode of the effect image to be the specific effect image disposed on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern to be the identification information image is a stationary mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative pattern to be the identification information image The display mode of the effect image may be an idling mode different from the stationary mode. As the idling mode, the temporary stop mode may be set such that the display mode of the specific effect image is different from that of the action mode in the above-described embodiment, as long as no misidentification of the display result occurs.

  In addition, during variable display in which variable display of decorative symbols is performed, for example, an effect image in which a message of "in symbol change" is notified as a speech of a character may be displayed as a specific effect image. On the other hand, in a period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol or the like is derived, for example, an effect image in which a message of "symbol determination" is notified as a speech of a character may be displayed as a specific effect image. As described above, the display mode of the specific effect image is made different by changing the content of the message notified as the speech of the character depending on whether the variable display is being performed or the display result is derived. It is also good.

  In a period in which a display result in variable display is derived when an effect image (character image) indicating a character including a plurality of portions is displayed as a specific effect image, during variable display in which variable display or the like of decorative design is performed A specific effect image may be displayed in a different display mode.

  As the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol may not be performed. As an example, the variable winning device provided in the game area is released from the closed state (second state) from the closed state (second state) based on detection of the game ball having passed (entered) the start winning opening provided in the game area When the game ball entered into the variable winning device changes to the first state) and enters a specific area (V prize opening) of the plurality of areas, the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player. It may be configured to In such a configuration, based on the detection of the game ball having passed (entered) the start winning opening, the determination result as to whether or not to change the variable winning device to the first state, or changes to the first state In relation to the determination result of changing the mode to any of a plurality of modes, or the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state according to the passing situation of the game ball inside the variable winning device In a period in which the display result in the related display is derived, when it is possible to execute the related effect for deriving the display result and arrange the specific effect image in the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image in the related display. The display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode.

  In the above embodiment, as the advantageous state advantageous to the player, the variable display result has been described as being controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the "big hit". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special gaming state such as a definite change state may be made an advantageous state, and the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit gaming states is the second round number (for example, "7 The jackpot gaming state may be set as an advantageous state in which the number of first rounds (for example, “15”) is greater than “). Alternatively, among the plurality of time saving states, the time saving state may be set as the advantageous state, in which the upper limit number of the variable display that can be performed is the first number (for example, "100") that is larger than the second number (for example "50"). Among the plurality of probability variation states, a probability variation state in which the first probability (for example, 1/20) in which the jackpot probability is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) may be set as the advantageous state. In addition, any game state that is advantageous to the player may be made into an advantageous state.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display displayed after the hold display change presentation is performed includes the display mode which is not displayed as the display form of the active display after the active display change presentation is performed, and the active display The display mode of the active display displayed after the change effect is performed is described as including the display mode which is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the hold display change effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display may be configured to include a display mode not displayed as the other display mode. . For example, the display mode of the hold display includes a unique display mode not displayed as the display mode of the active display, while the display mode of the active display is a common display mode that can be displayed as the display mode of the hold display. However, the display mode may not be a unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display. Moreover, while the display mode of the active display includes a unique display mode not displayed as the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is a common display mode that can be displayed as the display correspondence of the active display. However, there may be no unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display.

  When the on-hold display change effect is performed and the on-off display change effect is performed, a on-off display and on-off display may be performed in which at least a part of the on-display is changed. For the restriction effect, for example, an effect image for display restriction is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first hold display unit 5HR, the second hold display unit 5HL, and the active display unit AHA display translucent or transparent display. A part of the hold display or the active display by, for example, displaying the reduced display or shifting the production model (movable member) from the retracted state to the advanced state and concealing the held display or the active display in the advanced state. Alternatively, it may be limited as long as the player can not or can not visually recognize all.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the process of step S 242 shown in FIG. 8 includes “probability change”, and the probability change control condition is based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability change”. It is explained that it is established and controlled to a definite change state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, that the game ball which has won (entered) the big winning opening (the second big winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at the predetermined position in the gaming area is detected by the probability variation detection switch The probability change control condition is established based on the above, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability changing state. The big prize mouth (second big prize mouth) of the probability change attacker can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of times of execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example "16"), round When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, the closed state may not be changed to the open state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability change control condition based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed the specific area in the attacker, which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the gaming area. It may be configured to be

  The special symbol and the decorative symbol are not limited to those variably displayed as plural types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and during the variable display of the special symbols, only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs Turns on and off and the other LEDs remain off. Then, when the variable display result is “losing”, the LED in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated maintains the state of emitting (lighting) in a predetermined light emitting color, or maintaining the extinguished state, Stop displaying special symbols. At this time, the other LEDs remain turned off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the special symbol is stopped and displayed by becoming a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the plurality of LEDs are lit. In this way, while the special symbol or the decorative symbol is variably displayed, the specific (single) symbol is switched between the display and the non-display while the other symbols are kept in the non-display state. Good. Then, any one of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (confirmed special symbol or fixed ornament symbol) as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, the symbol display (lighting) indicating "-" Repeating non-display (off) may be repeated so that other numbers and symbols are not displayed. Then, as the variable display result of the special symbol, the symbol indicating "-" is not stopped and displayed, and a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating "1" to "9", other symbols, etc. Stop displaying the special symbol. In this way, during the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, the symbol which is not stopped and displayed as the variable display result is switched to the display or the non-display, while the other symbols are kept in the non-display state. May be

  In the above embodiment, the “proportion” or “probability” at which various decisions are made is 0% (not determined) or 100% (not necessarily determined), for example, 70:30. It may be set not to be determined, or at least 0% (cannot be determined) or 100% (must be determined) as the possibility of being a decision result It may be set. For example, in the case where various decisions are made, the ratio of the decision result of 1 being the ratio of the decision result of any one of the plurality of decision results being higher than that of the other decision results is 100% may be included, and other determination results may be included as 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of the other determination results is 0%. In addition, when the ratio to be the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio to be the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio to be the determination result of 1 is the other determination result It will be higher than the rate.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the variable control time of the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, etc. to the side of the effect control board 12, one variable pattern designation command is transmitted when the variable display is started. Although the example is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the side of the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the CPU 103 of the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo continuous change, presence or absence of slip effect, etc. Send a command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode before the so-called second stop), and the second command after reaching reach such as the type of reach and presence of re-lottery effect (reach and If not, a command indicating variable display time or variable display mode) may be transmitted after so-called second stop. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on a variable display time derived from a combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects a specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, in the next timer interrupt) ) A second command may be sent. Note that the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  In the above, an example is shown in which the main side performs prefetching determination and transmits a command corresponding to the determination result to the sub side. You may do it.

  The present invention is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. The slot machine is, for example, an arbitrary gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols serving as plural types of identification information and giving a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, and variably displays plural types of identification information (patterns) that can be identified. For example, one game is ended when the display results of a plurality of reels are derived and displayed, and the winnings are made according to the displaying results (for example, cherry winning, watermelon winning, bell winning, replay winning, BB winning, RB winning etc) Is a game machine in which it is possible to generate In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect moving mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine cooperate with the software for performing a predetermined process, and the pachinko machine shown in the above-described embodiment. It may be configured to have all or part of the features of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the display result in the variable display of the identification information is derived in a configuration in which the specific effect can be executed at the overlapping position on the front side of the display surface on which the design to be the identification information is variably displayed. In a certain period, in the overlapping position on the front side of the identification information, it is sufficient if the effect mode of the specific effect is a mode different from the effect mode during the variable display, such as a stationary mode or a temporary stop mode .

  In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device and the voice output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED The operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and it encloses gaming media and scores based on the occurrence of a prize. It can apply also to the enclosed type game machine which grants. The slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as gaming values, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using gaming balls as gaming values and only credits as gaming values It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, for example, when setting 3 as the number of bets, the number of bets is made using 15 game balls. Is equivalent to setting. The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of medals and game balls etc. The game value may be used in combination. For example, a slot machine can set a bet number and play a game using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and a plurality of medals and gaming balls etc. can be generated by winning. It may be possible to pay out any kind of gaming value.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a removable recording medium, for example, to a computer device included in a game machine such as pachinko It may be distributed without pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(1-1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is provided with an adjustment means realized by the effect control CPU 120 in cooperation with each part, and an adjustment image display means. The adjusting means can adjust the rendering effect according to the adjusting operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least while the variable display is being performed, and the adjusting image display means adjusts the adjustment result image R (corresponding to the adjustment by the adjusting means) An example of the adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined period T1. Then, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment result image R invisible in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result during the predetermined period T1. Since it did in this way, the fall of the recognizability of the variable display result derived | led-out displayed can be suppressed.

  Although the example in which the volume can be adjusted has been described above, the adjustable rendering effect may be display brightness of the image display device 5 or the like as described above. In addition, the adjustable rendering effect may be at least one of volume and brightness (that is, both volume and brightness may be adjustable). Further, the adjustment image may be displayed not only when the volume or the like is changed by the adjustment operation but also when it is not changed. Further, the adjustment image display means not only makes the adjustment image invisible in the derivation display period T2, but also displays the adjustment image in a semi-transparent mode or blinks in the derivation display period T2. It may be difficult to visually identify. Also in this case, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In this case, for example, processing for displaying the adjustment result image in a difficult-to-view mode is executed instead of step S712 in FIG. 24, and return from display in the hard-to-view mode in step S715 (within predetermined period T1) For example, the rendering effect setting process may be modified and configured such that the adjustment image is restored.

(1-2) Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means adjusts the adjustment result image R in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result within the predetermined period T1. The adjustment image may be displayed at a position not overlapping the specific effect image such as the promotion display image P, which is not visible or difficult to recognize. Also in this case, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. Further, since the adjustment image can be displayed while securing the visibility of the specific effect image, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the recognizability of the information displayed on the image display device 5.
The specified effect image displayed at a position not overlapping the adjustment image is not only the promotion display image P, the development notification image (see FIG. 35B), but also an image showing the character CH1, and the fourth symbol described above. Or an image showing a pending display.

(1-3) Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means adjusts the adjustment result image R in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result within the predetermined period T1. It may be made invisible or difficult to be recognized, and the adjusting means may not adjust the rendering effect related to the error notification. Also in this case, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, since the error sound and the display brightness of the error image can be kept at the specified values, it is possible to prevent the player or the store clerk from noticing the occurrence of an error despite the occurrence of an error. .
In addition, not only the error volume but also the brightness (light quantity) when an error image is displayed, the brightness of a lamp (such as game effect lamp 9) lit when an error occurs, etc. It may be

(2) Further, at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 25A). According to this configuration, since the adjusted image result image overlapping with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the variable display result.
In addition, the derivation display area of the variable display result in which at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps is not limited to the display area Ar (see FIG. 25A) of the decorative design, but the variable display of the effect image showing the small design It may be a small symbol display area 5V or the like in which the display result is derived.

(3) Further, the error image may not be erased even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 25 (D2)). In this way, the visibility of the error image can be secured.

(4) In addition, priority is given to display of an error image over display of the adjustment image (for example, in the process of step S57, until the CPU 120 for effect control that receives the abnormality notification command, the error indicated by the command is resolved). 25 (D1), (D2), etc.) may be continued. Also in this case, the visibility of the error image can be secured.

(5) Also, if the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is maintained so as to be visible (for example, refer to FIG. 25B), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demonstration display is erased (for example, effect control) The CPU 120 may execute the processing of steps S659, S660, and S662, etc.). In this way, the demonstration display can be suitably performed.

(6) The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the character display process for change effect of step S162, etc.) capable of displaying the specific effect image during execution of the variable display of the identification information The image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information (for example, see FIG. 23B), and the specific effect execution unit is in a period during which the variable display result of the identification information is derived. The display mode of the specific effect image may be a stationary mode (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step S609) at a position overlapping on the front side of the identification information. In this way, it is possible to prevent false recognition of the display result.

  In addition, the gaming machine is always smaller than the first area (for example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.) in which the identification information image is displayed. Constant display means (for example, steps S325 and S350) for performing variable display of the notification information image in synchronization with variable display of the identification information image in an area (for example, small symbol display area 5V etc.) You may provide CPU 120 for presentation control etc.). In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent misidentification of display results.

  In addition, information output means (for example, step S266) for outputting display control information (for example, a first change start command, a second change start command, etc.) that can specify that variable display is started according to the determination result of the determination means The effect execution unit may set the display mode of the specific effect image as a non-stationary mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of step S 607) in response to reception of display control information. Such as the part to execute. In this way, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result while suppressing the discomfort of the specific effect.

  In addition, correspondence display means (for example, active display unit AHA etc.) capable of executing correspondence display (for example, active display etc.) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information image during execution of variable display of the identification information image is still started. Hold display means (for example, the first start winning storage display area 5HR, the second start winning storage display area 5HL, etc.) for holding the display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information image not being displayed and the display mode of the hold display 1) First change effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the process of step S343 etc.) capable of executing the change effect (for example, the hold display change effect etc.) and the second change effect ((2) For example, a CPU for effect control that executes the process of step S345 (for example, second change effect means that can execute icon display change effect, etc.) 20) and the display mode of the suspension display displayed after the first change effect is performed is a special mode (for example, “the display mode of the corresponding display is not displayed after the second change effect is performed. Display etc.) may be included. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the misidentification of the display result while making it possible to execute the first change effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display to the special mode.

  In addition, the display mode of the corresponding display displayed after the second change effect is executed is a special mode (for example, “chance” or the like) which is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the first change effect is executed. "NEXT", "superheat", etc. may be included. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the false recognition of the display result while making it possible to execute the second change effect of changing the display mode of the correspondence display into the special mode.

  Further, the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image (see, for example, FIG. 23 (B)), and the specific effect execution means includes the identification information In the period in which the display result of the image is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a temporary stop mode at a position overlapping on the front side with respect to the identification information image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of presentation while preventing the misidentification of the display result.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later. For example, the present invention does not have to include all the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and deletion or addition of components is optional as long as the object can be achieved. For example, the period during which the adjusted image is not visible or difficult to see is not limited to the derived display period T2 of the variable display result. The adjusted image may not be visible or difficult to see in a period of reach action (for example, during full rotation). That is, the period for making the adjustment image invisible or the like may be a predetermined period in which an object that the player wants to recognize is notified. In addition, the adjustment image may be displayed at a position where it is superimposed on a specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. In addition, the effect on the error notification may be adjusted by the adjusting unit. Further, the display area of the adjustment image may not overlap with the derived display area of the variable display result.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiments and the modifications described later may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiments disclosed this time and the embodiments described below are illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and deriving and displaying a display result, which is a predetermined effect image (for example, a card image shown in FIG. 80, a card A common part (for example, a common part (for example, a common aspect) including predetermined effect executing means capable of displaying a character image on the left side of an image, an image of a finger, etc.) as a result of the predetermined effect regardless of the result of the predetermined effect Consisting of a character image on the left side of the card image in FIG. 80, an image of a finger, etc.) and a specific part (for example, a card image in FIG. 80) which is different according to the result of The means displays the predetermined effect image in the first mode in which the visibility of the specific part is low (a display mode with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80C and FIG. 80D). 1 aspect The predetermined effect image can be displayed in the second mode (a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80E) in which the visibility of the specific part is high, and at least while the variable display is performed, Adjustment means capable of adjusting the rendering effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player, and an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means (for example, adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 35B to 35D) The adjustment image display means for displaying a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period T1), and the adjustment image display means displays the variable display result when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period. A gaming machine capable of making the adjustment image invisible or difficult to recognize (for example, making the adjustment image translucent, making it blink, etc.) in a period in which the result is derived and displayed (for example, derived display period T2) Listed It is.

  According to the above-described gaming machine, the adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment of the rendering effect performed in accordance with the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player can suppress the decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result and the presentation image, and Since the effect image can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to suppress the dispersion of the player's attention during the game, and the interest can be improved.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an adjustment image or a predetermined effect image corresponding to the adjustment of the rendering effect performed in accordance with the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player may be displayed at the same time. It is also good. For example, when the predetermined effect image is displayed by the effect, the adjustment image may not be displayed by prohibiting the adjustment operation by the player, and the player's attention may not be dispersed. Furthermore, even when the predetermined effect image is displayed by the effect, the player's attention may not be dispersed by reducing the display of the adjustment image of the one that allows the adjustment operation by the player or making it semi-transparent. Good. In addition, after the predetermined effect image is displayed in the first mode in which the visibility of the specific portion is low (display mode with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80C and FIG. 80D), the first mode When the predetermined effect image is displayed in the second mode (a display mode having high visibility as shown in FIG. 80E) in which the visibility of the specific part is higher than that of the specific part, the player's attention to the specific image is dispersed. In the first aspect, the adjustment operation can be made possible by the player to display the adjustment image, and when the second aspect is displayed, the adjustment operation by the player is prohibited. The adjustment image may not be displayed.

  Furthermore, after the predetermined effect image is displayed in the first mode in which the visibility of the specific part is low (a display mode with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80C and FIG. 80D), the first aspect The following another embodiment can be mentioned as a gaming machine capable of displaying a predetermined effect image in the second mode (a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80E) in which the visibility of the specific part is high.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, another example of the embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 42 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another example embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in the vertical position and an enlarged open state in the tilting position by the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, the gaming ball passes through the second starting winning hole (enter) It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is on. It will be in the open state where it is easy to enter.

  In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and the normal open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enters) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. What is detected by the switches (a first start opening switch 9022A, a second start opening switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the "winning", winning to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "starting winning", and in particular, winning to the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning of the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  While a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A), the first special view reserve memory number (described later ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first special figure game executed on the first special symbol display device 904A (described later) or the decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established.

  In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the second start winning (the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022B), and the second special view reserve memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), it is executed in a second special figure game (described later) executed on the second special symbol display device 904B or the image display device 905 (described later). A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. The occurrence of the first start prize even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize. If the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated If the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  The number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the first special map reservation number, the second special image reservation number, and the total reservation number are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “the number of special image reservations” or “the number of reservation memories”. That is, when simply referred to as "the number of special map holding storage" or "the number of holding storage", one or two of the first special drawing holding storage number, the second special drawing holding storage number, and the total holding storage number Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 902 (below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B). The special variable winning ball device 907 forms a big winning opening that changes to a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by, for example, a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. Change (open, closed).

  As an example, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 9082 is in the OFF state and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning hole door when the solenoid 9082 is in the ON state. The big winning opening is open. The game ball which has passed (entered) the big winning opening in the open state is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, winning to the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening (detection of the game ball by count switch 9023). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of the prize in the big prize winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three) is greater. That is, the state of the special winning opening (opened state, closed state) greatly influences whether or not the player has an advantage. That is, when the special winning opening is in the open state, more winning balls can be expected compared to when the special winning opening is in the closing state, so when the special winning opening is in the opening state, the special winning opening is in the closing state It is very advantageous for the player compared to

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special images") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special figure" or "special figure 1", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 904A (same for the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the respective numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbol indicating “−”. Just do it. In addition, a special symbol is not limited to what is comprised from the number which shows "0"-"9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. FIG. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in 7-segment LEDs are set in advance are set as special symbols. You may display it.

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 902 (the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) . The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of hold for the first special view game) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. For example, the first hold indicator 9025A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the first special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new first start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. As described above, the expression “first hold display” is an operation based on the first special view hold information (the lighting control of the LED of the first hold indicator 9025A, the first start winning storage display area 905 HL (described later) In the case of pointing to the display itself based on the first special view suspension information (indication by the LED of the first suspension indicator 9025A or the display in the first start winning storage display area 905 HL (described later)) There is also. For example, the first hold display in the case where it is said that the first hold display is newly added to the first start winning storage display area 905HL (described later) indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to "second hold display" and "active display" (described later).

  The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible. For example, the second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new second start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”.

  On the left side portion of the game area in the game board 902, a pass gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a general drawing reserve display 9025C are provided. The gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, a gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. If the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 9020 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc. in the same manner as the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. Even if the standard drawing start condition for executing the standard drawing game is satisfied by the detection of the gaming ball by the gate switch 9021, the common drawing start condition for permitting the start of the standard drawing game is not satisfied ( For example, when the spread game established earlier is in execution), the execution of the spread game is suspended (the spread game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are plural types of identification information capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 905 is a first special figure game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. Corresponding to the game (special drawing game using the second special drawing), variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative display area).

  As one example, as shown in FIG. 42, decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In response to the start of the special view game (the first special view game or the second special view game), that is, in response to the start of the change of the special view (the first special view or the second special view) In each of the areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, a decorative symbol (finalized decorative symbol, final The stop symbol (also referred to as a stop symbol) is displayed in a stop state. That is, in the display area (the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R) of the image display device 905, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction (correspondence) with the first special view game (or the second special view game). The finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905C is referred to as a middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905R is also referred to as a right symbol.

  In the other embodiment, the effective lines formed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are five lines. Specifically, there are five lines of middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d and lower right line e shown by solid lines in FIG. 76 (A). In addition, the frame outside upper line f and the frame outside lower line g which were shown with the broken line in FIG. 76 (A) are ineffective lines.

  The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, alphabets, figures, character images related to predetermined motifs, etc.). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to the respective decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the decorative symbols of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, respectively. In addition, a decorative pattern is not limited to eight types, Any number may be sufficient (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.).

  In addition, the fixed display which is the stop display of the finalized special symbol which is the fixed display which is the variable display result of special symbol (also referred to as the special display display result) and which ends the variable display, the fixed display which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol Stop display to stop the variable display and to display the fixed display which stops the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal pattern which is the variable display result of the normal design (also referred to as common drawing display result) Also referred to as a complete stop indication, a final stop indication, or a derived indication (or simply "derived"). In addition, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol may not necessarily coincide with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time), the decorative symbol The fluctuation time of should be settled.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the determined special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the determined ornament symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of a predetermined effect may be started after the display of the finalized decorative symbol is stopped, and the finalized special symbol may be stopped when the predetermined effect is finished.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, there may be a case where stop display different from complete stop display (final stop display, derivation display) is performed. For example, temporary stop display may be performed in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined effect (for example, a slip effect (described later), a pseudo continuous effect (described later), a relottery effect (described later), or the like) is performed, temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, temporary stop display of a decorative symbol may be performed as what comprises a part of said predetermined | prescribed effect, and temporary stop display of decorative symbol may be performed with execution of the said predetermined | prescribed effect. That is, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be considered to be part of the predetermined effect, or may be considered to be different from the predetermined effect. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed has become "0", for example, is displayed while causing slight shaking, expansion and contraction, etc., or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) It includes things that are stopped and displayed without causing time, slight shaking or stretching.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, a first start winning combination storage display area 905HL and a second start winning combination storage display area 905HR are arranged. In the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL, similarly to the first suspension indicator 9025A, a first suspension display is performed to display the first special map suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of first special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL, as in the second suspension display 9025B, a second suspension display is performed to display the second special view suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of second special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the first special view game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 905HL, the first starting winning storage display A new first hold display is added on the right side of area 905HL (center side of the display area of image display device 905) as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special view hold information, and the first start winning storage display area 905HL If there is another first pending display in the above, the new first pending on the left side of the other first pending display (more than the other left first pending display if there are multiple other first pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first suspension displays in the first start winning storage display area 905HL, when the number of suspension of the first special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduction The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 905HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other first pending displays is shifted (shifted) to the erased first pending display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, the second starting winning storage display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 905HR (center side of the display area of the image display device 905) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special view hold information, and a second start prize storage display area 905HR If there is another second pending display in the above, the new second pending on the right side of the other second pending display (more than the other right second pending display if there are multiple other second pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, when the number of holdings of the second special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second of the decrease amount The second hold display (the second hold display, which has been displayed since the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 905HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side).

  When the first start winning storage display area 905HL and the second start winning storage display area 905HR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start winning storage display area 905H".

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 905, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a display area at the time of digestion, etc.) AHA is arranged. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a display at the time of digestion, a display this time, etc.) is displayed based on the hold display being erased from the start winning a prize storage display area 905H when the start condition is satisfied. For example, when the first start condition is met, the first hold display displayed on the far right of the first start winning storage display area 905HL moves (shifts) to the active display area AHA to display the active display, and the second start When the condition is satisfied, the second hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 905HR moves (shifts) to the active display area AHA and the active display is displayed. The display mode of the pending display immediately before moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA may be different from the display mode of the active display immediately after moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA. That is, when shifting to the active display, the display mode may change. Hereinafter, the active indication displayed based on the certain pending indication M being erased may also be referred to as the active indication corresponding to the pending indication M. That is, "corresponding" in "the active display corresponding to the hold display" means that the active display takes over at least a part of the hold display when the variable display such as a decorative pattern is started by the stop display disappearing. It is a concept that includes being displayed in a similar manner to that displayed on the screen or displayed in a similar manner to the suspended display (for example, when the same character is drawn).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another embodiment, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 905HL and the second starting winning storage display area 905HR, as shown in FIG. The active display area AHA may be disposed at any position in the display area of the image display device 905.

  In the game area of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the game balls entering any of the general winning openings are detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Attached to the member forming the lower tray is, for example, a stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is put on when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 9031A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is a two transparent photosensor (parallel sensor) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 901 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031 B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 9031 A). It is provided. The push button 9031 B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 9031 B, for example, to detect a player's operation performed on the push button 9031 B.

  A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 42, the speakers 908UL and 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the speakers 908LL and 908LR are installed at the lower left and right lower sides of the upper tray (the lower left and right diagonal upper sections). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "speakers 908". The speaker 908 outputs (reproduces) sound (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 908 outputs a rendering sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 901, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 901.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song or the like which is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, a message) or the like which is output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning on the first start winning opening etc). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to the operation act on the push button 9031B. In addition, since the operation act on the push button 9031 B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation act on the push button 9031 B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the presentation sound is, for example, a sound to notify of requesting an operation action to the push button 9031 B, a voice, a sound to notify transition to the reach state at the time of transition of the reach state (described later), a voice or These are sounds, voices, and the like for giving notice or suggestion to shift to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is opened, etc. .

The internal and peripheral portion of the game area for a game machine frame 903, movable won game operating as director or decorative (movable body) is al provided. In the example shown in FIG. 42, the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 42) to the second position (the lower position; for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 905) at the upper position of the image display device 905. A movable movable object 9017 is provided.

  In the inside and the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903, light emitting members (light emitters) for emitting light as effects or decorations are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 42, the light emitting member 909 CC is installed on the movable part 9017, and the light emitting member 909 CL and the light emitting member 909 CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 905. A light emitting member 909 SL and a light emitting member 909 SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903 U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR will be collectively referred to as "lamps 909" unless otherwise specified. The lamp 909 may be configured by, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured by a flash lamp. The light emitting member 909U may be a rotary lamp (for example, a lamp lamp) having a rotary unit. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 or the like) in the game area.

  Although the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the movable role object 9017 described above are effect devices for executing effects, the game machine 901 is, for example, a device having a vibrating portion, other effects such as a device having a blower portion A device may be provided.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each structure is an example, Comprising: You may be arrange | positioned in another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display 9020 may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, and the common view hold indicator 9025C may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 9020 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol (per normal symbol)" It becomes ". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost (normal Design loss)). In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a special drawing game (first special drawing game) by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition. A special drawing game (second special drawing game) by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the establishment of the second starting condition after the starting condition is established. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is a loss. In addition, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A, such as lost design, will be a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B The special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol and a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning prize ball device 907 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is controlled to the open state is an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 901 determines a round (also referred to as a “round game”) advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. Execute the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the state (opened state, closed state) of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 in each round (each round). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the big winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the big winning opening from the closing state to the opening state, maintains the big winning opening in the opening state, and then closes the big winning opening door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is ended.

  It should be noted that instead of opening the big winning opening door immediately at the start of the round and changing the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the big winning opening is closed without immediately opening the big winning opening door at the start of the round. It is also possible to maintain it, and then open the big winning opening door to change the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state. Also, instead of closing the big winning opening door at the end of the round and changing the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state, the winning opening door is closed to change the big winning opening from the opening state to the closing state. It is good also as an aspect which maintains and, after that, finishes a round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 changes the large winning opening to the open state once in one round (changes the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). The pachinko gaming machine 901 may change the big winning opening to an open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may change the big winning opening to the opening state twice in one round (in the single round, the big winning opening is open → closed → open → closed). May change with the state).

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 repeatedly executes the round in the big hit gaming state until the number of times of execution of the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even if the number of round executions has reached the predetermined upper limit number, the execution of the round is performed by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball does not win at the big winning opening). You may complete the

  Note that the predetermined upper limit number of times may be one type (e.g., always ten times) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit number may be any number selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of numbers (for example, two times, eight times, and sixteen times).

  For the special winning opening in the round, either a predetermined upper limit opening time elapses after opening the special winning opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the special winning opening occur. It is kept open until it is established. Note that the predetermined upper limit opening time may be one type (for example, always 29 seconds) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit opening time may be any time selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of time (for example, 0.1 seconds, 29 seconds).

  In the round, the winning opening is kept closed (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case where the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and the round is started, the big winning opening is closed until the predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the big winning opening door is closed. It is kept closed for a period. Also, for example, in a mode in which the round starts while maintaining the big winning opening in a closed state, the big winning opening is in a closing state until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the start of the round. Maintained. The predetermined time (closed period) may be of one type (e.g., always 3 seconds) or may be of multiple types. For example, the predetermined time (closing period) may be any time selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds).

  From the above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 executes, for example, eight rounds of changing the big winning opening from open (29 seconds) to closed (3 seconds) in the big hit gaming state, or opens the big winning opening. Execute each round changing the status (29 seconds) → closed status (3 seconds) 16 times or open the big winning opening (0.1 second) → closed status (1 second) → open status (0.1) Each round may be performed twice, changing from s) to closed state (1 s). Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the big winning opening after executing each round eight times in which the big winning opening is changed from the opening state (29 seconds) to the closing state (3 seconds) in the big hit gaming state. It is also possible to execute eight rounds each time changing from 1 second to closed state (1 second).

  In addition, among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round where the upper limit open time is relatively long (for example, the round where the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as the normal open round, and the upper limit open time is relatively short round (for example, open The round where the state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short open round.

  In addition, among the special symbols which are the big hit symbols, the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal opening round (the big hit symbols controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round big hit symbol . Among the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol corresponding to a short opening round (a jackpot symbol controlled to a jackpot gaming state in which a short opening round is executed later) may be referred to as a short opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normally open big hit state) controlled after the normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the normal opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). In addition, in the big hit gaming state (short-term opening big-hit state) controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a final special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) Ru. In addition, if the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state compared to the short opening big hit state, the short opening round is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the jackpot state, a normal opening round may be performed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a value obtained by the player in each big hit gaming state as a big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, ie It is possible to prepare (implement) various jackpot gaming states in which the degree of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of playing balls)) seen from the player is made different.

  As an example when not using the short-term opening round, the round which is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state which executes 8 rounds (normal opening round) 8 rounds which is a big hit gaming state which executes round (normal opening round) It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state that executes (normally open round) 16 times. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time of the respective open state (open time), the round (normally open round) In the big hit gaming state to be executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls out of the big hit gaming state to execute round (normally open round) 8 times.

  As an example in the case of using the short-term opening round, the big hit gaming state (mainly 8 round big hit gaming state) which executes the short opening round eight times after executing the normal opening round eight times and the big hit gaming state substantially eight rounds It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player and performs 16 times of the normal opening round. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times the big winning opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round, and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of balls obtained in the short open round If the jackpot is small enough to be ignored, in the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the jackpot gaming state of the real eight rounds.

  In addition, even if the upper limit opening time has not elapsed after opening the special winning opening door, if a predetermined number of winning to the special winning opening occurs, the special winning opening changes from the opening state to the closing state, The value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a predetermined number of differences. For example, the jackpot gaming state in which eight regular opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of five is performed, and eight normal opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of five. A jackpot gaming state may be prepared in which eight predetermined opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) having the predetermined number of 10, which is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot execution state executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening. For example, the player is more advantageous than the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state in which the number of prize balls is six is executed 16 times and the jackpot state in which the prize balls number is six is performed 16 times; A big hit gaming state may be prepared in which a normal opening round with 12 winning balls is executed 16 times.

  Also, in addition to the value that the player gets from the big hit gaming state itself (the value that the player gets during the big hit gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is controlled after the big hit gaming state, The value that the player gets after the big hit gaming state by changing the length of the period (for example, the number of time cuts, the number of ST times) during which the playing state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 controlled after the big hit gaming state is maintained May be different.

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit (described later) as a big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. There are a big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed eight times, and a big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round controlled after becoming the 16R probability variation big hit (described later) is executed sixteen times.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is variable during a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be in the predetermined reach state which constitutes a part of the combination of a display.

  With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that has not been stopped yet is displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching.

  Also, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be A rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 908, the light emission operation of the lamp 909 (off, blinking, lighting, etc.) and the operation of the movable part 9017 (still, Fine movement, movement and the like may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before reaching the reach state.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”). As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different according to which one of the plurality of reach effects is performed, that is, according to which reach effect is to be generated. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a high jackpot expectation degree higher than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree by a certain production is, for example, (probability that the production will be executed at the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability of the presentation being performed at the big hit) × (probability of the big hit) It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than the big hit time) × (probability of not becoming a big hit). In addition, when a certain effect is executed, when it always becomes a "big hit", the big hit expectation degree of the effect is "1". The same is true for the super reach expectation degree by a certain effect.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a slip effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like which is realized by a variable display operation such as the decorative symbol. The slip effect is an effect of re-variably displaying the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in one special drawing game. Alternatively, it is an effect of re-variably displaying a part of the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol temporarily in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. According to the slip effect, the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop display can be changed to another symbol, so that it can appear as if, for example, the reach state is reached from the non-reach state.

  The pseudo series effect re-displays the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol in a part or all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in one special figure game It is an effect that The re-variable display in the pseudo series effect can be performed a plurality of times (for example, up to four times) for one special drawing game.

  The number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display frequency) in the pseudo-sequence effect is the number of variable display (first variable display) until all decorative patterns in temporary decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R first stop temporarily. The number of times (one time) of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative symbols last and the number of times of re-variable display between the first variable display and the last variable display X X is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) smaller by one time than the number of times (X + 2) of adding 0 and 1 or more. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times that all decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R (number of temporary stops). Further, the number of re-variable display in the pseudo-series effect is also referred to as the number of pseudo-sequences (or the number of pseudo-series variation). That is, the number of times of pseudo run, the number of times of re-variable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. The increase in the number of times of pseudo run to the first time, the second time, the third time, and so on is also referred to as "the pseudo run continues".

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", re-variable display (re-variation) is performed 1 to 4 times, and based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, the decorative symbol is variable It can appear as if the display started two to five times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once or twice is shown (see FIG. 46), but re-variable display (re-variation) may be performed three or more times.

  In addition, a pseudo ream may be performed before reach establishment, and may be performed after reach establishment. That is, in the pseudo-series effect, the temporary stop display may be performed before the reach state, or the temporary stop display may be performed after the reach state.

  The slip effect (as well as the pseudo effect) is a notice to the player that the player may perform any reach effect, or that a certain reach effect may be executed, and that the big hit expectation is high. It is also good. Hereinafter, a player may be notified of an indication that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, that the jackpot expectation is high, etc.

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo continuous effect may be executed as the advance effect. For example, fluctuation start timing (for example, when left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol start to change at the same time, timing to start the change simultaneously, and left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol do not start to change simultaneously) The effect of changing the start of the first change of the pattern, etc.) is different from the normal time, and the effect of changing the start order of the left, middle, and right patterns from the normal time is noticeably produced. It may be executed as In addition, display operations other than the variable display operation may be performed as advance notice effects. For example, an effect of making the background image different from that at the normal time or an effect of making the hold display different from that at the normal time may be executed as the advance effect. The advance notice effect may be an operation other than the display operation. For example, the advance notice effect may be an audio output by the speaker 908, the light emission of the lamp 909, the operation of the movable part 9017, or the like.

  In addition, the notification (prediction, suggestion) by the advance presentation effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed as long as it is performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may be performed as long as it is performed before the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading preview effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as pending display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the pending information of the target It is also called variable target display. In addition, the preread advance notice effect is executed during the digestion of the pending information of the target (when executed during the digesting process of the pending information of the target including variable display of the target) and before the pending information of the target There are a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information, and a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information of the target and during the digest of the hold information before the hold information of the target.

  In addition, as the pre-reading advance notice effect, a hold effect by the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning storage display area 905HL or the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR may be prepared. For the hold effect, a first hold display to be added to the first start winning memory display area 905HL when the first start winning is generated, and a second hold display to be added to the second start winning memory display area 905HR when the second start winning is generated. The effect of displaying in the notice mode (additional hold effect), or the first hold display or the second hold display that has already been displayed changes to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode. , Etc.) and effects to be performed when the first hold display and the second hold display change to the notice mode, and characters and the like are directly displayed on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 905. It is an effect (hold action effect) which is caused to act in an indirect or indirect manner, or an effect to be executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. Effect to directly or indirectly act Rakuta like to hold display (pending action Gase effect) may be included, such as. In addition, when the pending action effect is executed, the display mode of the first pending display (or the second pending display) to be acted changes, but when the pending action gasse effect is executed, the first pending display (or The display mode of the second hold display does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in active display area AHA may be prepared as a preliminary production. In the active display effect, an effect that displays the active display to be added to the active display area AHA in the notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) or the active display that has already been displayed changes to the notice mode (from one notice mode to another This includes the change to the advance notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) and the effect to be executed when the active display changes to the advance notice mode, and the character etc. is activated in the display area of the image display device 905 It is an effect (active display effect effect) to act directly or indirectly on the display, or an effect to be executed when the active display does not change to the advance notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed on the display area of the image display device 905 Directed or indirectly operated effects (active display effect 演出 effect) etc. are included It may be. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display which is the action target changes, but when the active display action effect is performed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the start winning), or may be determined at the change. In addition, there are also cases where a combination of a hold effect and an active display effect is referred to as a hold effect or the like.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  In this embodiment, as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers of "3", "5" and "7") that become the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number "3" When the special symbol indicating the symbol or the number of "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". Also, when the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". The round controlled at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit is usually an open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7” is a normally open round jackpot symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed as described above, the 8R probability variation is a big hit, but the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed. It may be made to become "2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as" probability ")" in which a short-term opening round is executed. The special symbol indicating the number of "5" in this case is a short-term open round big hit symbol (also referred to as a sudden symbol). In "big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit", and "2R probability variation big hit" are called "big hit type".

  Specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached and the predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, etc., the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is that the same symbol number is an odd number and three identical decorative symbols are arranged on the effective line formed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (ie, "1", "1", "1", "3", "3", "3", "5", "5", "5", "7" , "7", "7" and so on).

  Specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number of "3" or "5" is stopped and displayed in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached and predetermined After the reach effect of is executed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is one in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged with an even symbol number on a predetermined effective line formed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( That is, those arranged in line with “2”, “2”, “2”, those arranged in “4”, “4”, “4”, those arranged in “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, “8” and so on).

  In this embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit is set as 2R probability variation big hit, when it becomes 2R probability variation big indication, the variable indication of the decoration design is started, reach condition becomes specified reach After the rendition is executed or the like, or without reaching a reach state, the finalized decoration symbol to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit may be stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to a 2R probability variation big hit is an odd numbered symbol number on the predetermined effective line formed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a different decorative symbol (one of at least three) A set of three decorative designs with different patterns (for example, "1", "3", "5", "3", "5", "7", "5", "5", "7" Or a combination including a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a combination of “1”, “probability”, “2”, etc.).

  In addition, when the special symbol which shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed in the special figure game, when the fixed decoration symbol which becomes the big hit combination which corresponds to 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, 8R probability variation on the surface There may be a case where the finalized decoration pattern to be the big hit combination corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the 16R probability variation big hit, the normal release round is controlled 16 times (round) to be executed to the normal release big hit state, and after that, time variation control (time shortening control) and probability variation control (probability fluctuation control ) Is done. In addition, based on the 8R probability variation hit, the normal release round is controlled to a normally open jackpot state in which eight rounds are executed, and after that, probability variation control is performed together with time saving control.

  By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" in the special figure game each time is improved to be higher than when the probability change control is not performed. The probability change control is one of the conditions when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the number of probability changes) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result is "big hit". End when it is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probability change control is being performed, the probability change control finish. The predetermined number of times of ST is, for example, 70 times.

  Further, by performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed. Further, when the time saving control is performed, the stop display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the big hit gaming state is over, when a predetermined time-saving number of special drawing games are executed and the variable display result is a "big hit", either condition is established first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games have been consumed. Note that the predetermined time reduction number is, for example, 70 times.

  When time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 9020 (general drawing variation time) is shorter than that when the time reducing control is not performed, or Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the symbol is "per common drawing" than when time saving control is not performed, the variable display result is "per common drawing" in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on The game ball has a second start winning game such as control to make tilt control time to perform tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts than when time reduction control is not performed. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easy to pass through (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The short time state (high base state) and the high certainty state (probable state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A game state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a game state in a high probability state (probability state) and also in a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability high base state or time reduction probability state Also called. The game state in which only time change control is performed and time reduction control and high opening control are not performed, that is, the game state which is a high probability state (probability state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability low base state It is also referred to as a timeless nondeterministic state. In addition, only the high certainty high base state (time reduction attached definite change state) may be called "probable change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control being performed, that is, a gaming state in which the high base state (time reduction state) is not a high probability state (probability state), is also referred to as a low probability high base state Be done. The game state in which time change control is not performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, the game state in neither high probability state (probability state) nor high base state (time reduction state) is also referred to as low probability low base state Be done. The low probability low base state is a normal state in which neither probability change control nor short time control nor high open control is performed. Therefore, the low probability low base state is distinguished from high probability high base status, high probability low base status, low probability high base status, etc. It may be called "normal state". In addition, the gaming state which is not the big hit gaming state may be referred to as the "normal state" in distinction from the big hitting gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, the state after the initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is the normal state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, based on the fact that 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to a normally open big hit state, and after that, a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) Controlled by the state.

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) and the ST count (positive variation number) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R positive variation big hit, 16R It is also possible to make the number of time reductions after becoming the probability variation big hit different from the number of times of ST (number of probability variation). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the probability variation number) and the ST number after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations) are the same (both 70 times), but the 8R probability variation The number of STs after the big hit (the number of definite variations) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R certainty variation hit (the number of certain variations). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit and the time reduction number after becoming a 16R probability variation big hit are the same (both 70 times), but the time reduction number after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit And the number of time savings after becoming a 16R probability variation big hit may be made different.

  In this embodiment, a 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when a 2R probability variation big impact is provided, a short-term opening round is executed twice (round) based on the 2R probability variation big hit. The state change control may be performed along with the time-saving control, as in the case of the 16R positive variation big hit or the 8R high probability big hit after being controlled to the state.

  In this embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, when the special figure game of the predetermined ST number (number of probability variations) is digested, Although the probability change control is ended, the probability change control may not be ended until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (number of probability changes). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next big hit. When providing a positive variation big hit that continues the positive variation control until the next big hit, a normal big hit may not be provided after the termination. For example, the normal opening round is controlled to a normal opening big hit state which is executed eight times (round), and after that, the probability change control is not performed (time reduction control or high opening control may or may not be performed ), 8R normal jackpot may be provided.

  In addition, when the decision "with probability change fall" is made to end the high certainty state in the probability change fall lottery which is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change control is ended You may When such a mode is adopted, the special game with a predetermined number of STs (number of definite variations) is not broken until the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (number of definite variations) is digested without performing the probability variation fall lottery In each game, a random change lottery may be made. The same applies to time saving control and high release control.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for the decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, after the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, it is again varied in the state where the same decorative symbol is aligned Alternatively, one of a decorative pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and an ornament pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R positive variation big hit may be displayed as a final decoration symbol as a final decoration display. In this embodiment, a 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but the same applies to the case where a decoration pattern serving as a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is temporarily stopped when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided.

  In addition, after the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to 8R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is In the period until the start, the round number promotion effect may be performed to notify that the big hit is a 16R probability variation big hit. In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case in which a definite decoration symbol serving as a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although a big hit is not usually provided, when a finalized symbol is derived and displayed which is normally a big hit combination corresponding to a big hit when a big hit is provided, a period until the final round ends ( Alternatively, after the end of the final round, in a period until the next variable display game is started, a probability change promotion effect may be performed to notify that the big hit is a probability change big hit.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion direction effect) to be executed during the round is called the jackpot promotion operation (big hit medium round number promotion effect, big hit medium probability change promotion direction), and after the final round is over The promotion effect to be executed (round number promotion effect, definite variation promotion effect) may be referred to as ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 43 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the 909 and the movable part 9017 are mounted.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012, causes the speaker 908 to output sound. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the lamp 909 and the like are turned on / off driven. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted. The character and article control board 9016 is a control board for character and article movement control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and drives the movable character 9017 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. A circuit or the like that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 43, the main substrate 9011 is connected with a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023, the game machine 901 is similarly connected to the main substrate 9011 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board, a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 902 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, or a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 9011 includes a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and a common view hold indicator 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 44 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 44A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or more than three. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each production control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM90101, for example. When transmitting a certain effect control command to the effect control board 9012, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer It may be stored in the buffer area that has been Thereafter, the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 52) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Is transmitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the start of fluctuation in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying of a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost” or “16R positive variation big hit” or “8R positive variation big hit” or the big hit type Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination designating command for specifying a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designating command for designating a current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The command 9F00 (H) is a waiting for customer demonstration specification command for specifying a waiting for customer demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or short open end big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is the first special based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the first starting winning has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination notification command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special view game by the symbol display device 904A is established (“first starting opening winning combination designation command,” “first starting Sometimes referred to as a mouth winning command ").

  The command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball having passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022 B, and the second starting winning is generated. A second start opening prize notification command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special drawing game by the special symbol display device 904B is established (“second start opening winning designation command”, “second It may be referred to as "starting opening winning combination command".

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special view storage number in order to display the first special view storage number in an identifiable manner in the first start winning storage display area 905HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second start winning storage display area 905HR or the like.

  For example, when the first start winning combination occurs (when the number of the first special view pending storage increases), the first pending opening number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening win notification command as the pending storage information. Further, when the second start winning combination occurs (when the number of the second special view pending storage increases), the second pending storage number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting opening win notification command as the pending storage information. If the first start winning combination occurs, the second pending storage number notification command may be sent in addition to the first starting opening winning combination notification command or the first pending storage number notification command, or the second start winning combination occurs. In this case, the first hold storage number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the second starting opening winning notification command and the second hold storage number notification command. In addition, when the number of first special view reservations (or the number of second special views pending storage) increases, the first displayed start winning storage display area 905 HL (or the second start winning storage display area 905 HR) etc. Send the first pending storage number addition specification command (or the second pending storage number addition specification command) to specify the addition of the special figure pending storage number (second special figure pending storage number), and the first special figure pending storage number ( Or, if the number of 2nd Tokushu Pending Storages decreases, the 1st Pending Storage Number Subtraction Designation Command (or 2nd Pending) that specifies subtraction of No. 1 Tokushu Pending Storage (or 2nd Tokushu Pending Storage) A storage number subtraction specification command may be transmitted.

  Note that, instead of or in addition to the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command may be sent to notify the total pending storage number. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be sent which designates addition (or subtraction) of the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of the big hit type as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a "variation category command") indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In this embodiment, at the time of winning random number value determination processing (FIG. 56), the variation category except for some cases (for example, when there is the first starting winning in the high base state etc.) when the starting winning occurs. The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 'for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 9012 is performed. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 super-reaches the variable display based on the start winning based on the value set in the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 when the start winning occurs. It can be recognized whether or not.

  Note that the effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern specification command and the variable display result notification command control one or more of the effect devices (image display device 905, speaker 908, lamp 909, movable role object 9017, etc.) Used when Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the display operation in the image display device 905 is also referred to as a display control command, and the effect control command used to control the audio output operation by the speaker 908 is also referred to as an audio control command. The effect control command used to control the light emission operation is also referred to as a lamp control command, and the effect control command used to control the operation of the movable role object 9017 is also referred to as a “subject control command”. Note that among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, an audio control command, a lamp control command, and a feature control command, even if there are those related to a plurality of effect devices. Good.

  The command D0XX is a large winning opening winning notification command for notifying that there has been a game ball winning to the large winning opening (sometimes referred to as a large winning opening winning designation command). The special winning opening winning notification command is transmitted, for example, from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 when the game ball passes the special winning opening.

  The command D1XX is a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command which designates that the normal symbol variation start by the common symbol symbol display 9020 and that the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit. The command D2XX is a normal symbol variation start designation (loss) command that designates the start of variation of the normal symbol by the common symbol display 9020 and designates that the display result of the normal symbol is lost. The command D3XX is a normal symbol variation end designation command which designates that the variation of the normal symbol is ended. If the variation time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state, the normal symbol variation end designation command may not be used.

  The command E0XX is a magnetic anomaly notification designation command for designating notification that a magnetic anomaly has occurred. For example, a magnet sensor (not shown, also referred to as a magnetic sensor) is provided on the back of a predetermined area of the game area 902, and the magnetic abnormality notification designation command detects an abnormality (a magnet sensor showing an abnormal value When a signal is input), it is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. In addition, a magnet sensor detects abnormality, for example, when there is an act of making a game ball illegally induce to a winning opening using a magnet. In addition, as a detection method of magnetic abnormality, a reference value may be always fixed and an abnormal value may be detected, or an abnormal value may be detected with a magnetic value at power-on as a reference value.

  As described above, the effect control command shown in FIG. 44 (A) is an example, and the effect control command used in the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 44 (A). For example, a gate passage notification command (also referred to as a gate passage designation command) for notifying that the gaming ball has passed through the passage gate 9041 or a probability variation confirmation notification command for notifying that it is a probability variation jackpot may be used.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103 Data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory view illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 9011, a random value MR1 ′ for determining a special display result, a random value MR2 ′ for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation category. The numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 'for determining the common pattern display result and the random number value MR5' for determining the variation pattern is controlled so as to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random value MR1 'to MR5'. The CPU 90103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. It is also possible to count numerical data indicating a part of MRMR5 '.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. In the lost fluctuation pattern, “non-reach fluctuation pattern (“ non-reach lost fluctuation pattern ”“ non-reach fluctuation pattern ”corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”among the cases where the variable display results in (Also referred to as “variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach possibility variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” Also included).

  Further, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit fluctuation pattern includes a "big hit fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". It is also good. As the jackpot fluctuation patterns, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the jackpot types may be prepared.

  For non-reach variation patterns, prepare multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to the time reduction control that is executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is high probability state or time reduction state You should keep it. Thus, control of shortening the fluctuation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state can be performed by selecting any variation pattern according to the total pending storage number and the gaming state.

  For fluctuation patterns including reach effects such as a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in this embodiment. In FIG. 46, the variation category “PA1 ′” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1'-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1 '". The fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" and "PA2'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA2 '". The fluctuation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3 '". The fluctuation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns "PA4'-1" to "PA4'-3" belong to the variation category "PA4 '". The variation category “PA5 ′” is a super reach β (loss) variation category. The variation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-3" belong to the variation category "PA5 '". The variation category “PB1 ′” is a shortening / reach (big hit) variation category. The variation pattern "PB1'-1" belongs to the variation category "PB1 '". The variation category "PB3 '" is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3 '". The fluctuation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns "PB4'-1" to "PB4'-3" belong to the variation category "PB4 '". The variation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The variation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-3" belong to the variation category "PB5 '".

  The variation category "PA4 '" and the variation category "PA5'" are collectively referred to as "super reach (loss) variation category", and the variation category "PB4 '" and the variation category "PB5'" are collectively " Collectively referred to as the super reach (big hit) variation category, combine the variation category "PA4 '", the variation category "PA5'", the variation category "PB4 '" and the variation category "PB5'" with the "super reach variation category" Collectively.

  Note that among the super reach variation categories, the variation category “PA 5 ′” and the variation category “PB 5 ′” may be variation categories with bonus feature motion including the motion of the movable character 17. The fluctuation category “PA4 ′” and the fluctuation category “PB4 ′” may be a fluctuation category without an accessory operation which does not include the operation of the movable character 17. That is, the movable part 9017 does not operate in the super reach α, but the movable part 9017 may operate in the super reach β.

  The variation pattern “PA2′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA2′-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-2" is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to the other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

  The variation pattern "PA3'-1" belonging to the variation category "PA3 '" is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3′-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The variation pattern “PA4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern "PA5'-1" belonging to the variation category "PA5 '" is a super reach beta (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5′-2” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5′-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern "PB3'-1" belonging to the variation category "PB3 '" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3′-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern "PB1'-1" belonging to the variation category "PB1 '" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shortened than the variation pattern "PB3'-1".

  In addition, although fluctuation category "PB1" was explained as shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category, shortening by which three symbols (for example, the same symbol) stop at the same time without passing through reach becomes big hit -It may be a non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category. A variation pattern "PB1'-1" when the variation category "PB1 '" is a shortening / non-reach (big hit) variation category is a shortening / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern. In addition, "shortening / non-reach (big hit)" is also referred to as "hit", and "shortening / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category" is also referred to as "butt fluctuation category", and "short / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern" "Is also referred to as" hit variation pattern ". The variation category “PB1 ′” may include a shortening / reach (big hit) variation pattern and a shortening / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern.

  The variation pattern “PB4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation pattern “PB5′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5′-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5′-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition to the above, a fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed, or a fluctuation in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) (for example, an inclining effect similar to the pseudo continuous effect is executed but not temporarily stopped) is executed. You may prepare a pattern.

  In this embodiment, a 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, a variation category for 2R probability variation big hit (probability) may be provided. For example, variation categories “PC1 ′”, “PC2 ′”, and “PC3 ′” for 2R probability variation big hit (probability) may be provided. The fluctuation pattern "PC1'-1" and "PC1'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PC1 '". The variation pattern “PC1′-1” is a non-reach (probable) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC1′-2” is a non-reach (probable) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is performed once. In addition, you may prepare the non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which a slip production is performed.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC2′-1” to “PC2′-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC2 ′”. The variation pattern “PC2′-1” is a super reach α (probability) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2′-2” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC2′-3” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. In addition, a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern may be prepared, in which a gusset of pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC3′-1” to “PC3′-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC3 ′”. The variation pattern “PC3′-1” is a super reach β (probable) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3′-2” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC3′-3” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. In addition, you may prepare the super reach (beta) (probability) change pattern in which the gusset of a pseudo | simulation continuous change (effect) is performed.

  In the ROM 90101 of the microcomputer 90100 for game control shown in FIG. 43, various data used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations and settings. The ROM 90101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 9011. The data etc. which comprise the table of 4 are stored.

  FIG. 47 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. The display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 47 is a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. In the game (the special figure game using the second special figure), before the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is a big hit as "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)" It is a table to be referred to in order to determine whether or not to control to the game state, based on the random number value MR1 'for special figure display result determination.

  In the display result determination table 90130, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special image display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is assigned to the special figure display result of ")" and "loss". Specifically, in the display result determination table 90130, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special display result according to whether the low probability state or the high probability state is obtained. , "Big hit" and "lost" is assigned to the special display display results.

  In the display result determination table 90130, when the gaming state is in the high certainty state, more determination values are allocated to the "big hit" special view display result than when the gaming state is the low certainty state. Specifically, in the low certainty state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determination values (values in the range of "8000" to "8189") are assigned to the "big hit" special view display result. On the other hand, in the high certainty state, the judgment values "8000" to "8818" of more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) are assigned to the "big hit" special map display results. In such a setting, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is considered as a "big hit" compared to when it is in the non probability change state (low probability state). The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high.

  In the first special drawing display result determination table for the first special drawing, different display result determination tables are used for the first special drawing and the second special drawing. The judgment value is assigned, and in the second special drawing display result determination table for the second special drawing, the special drawing display result of the "small hit" of the judgment value of the predetermined range smaller than the first special drawing display result determination table May be assigned to This makes it possible to avoid frequent occurrences of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the gaming ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B.

  FIG. 48 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The big hit classification determination table 90131 determines the big hit classification to be any of a plurality of kinds based on the random number value MR2 'for the big hit classification determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit". Is a table that is referenced to In the big hit classification determination table 90131, whether to execute the first special view game (the special view game using the first special view) by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special view game by the second special symbol display device 904B The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 'for determining the big hit type according to whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is the respective big hit type (16 R probability variation big hit, 8 R It is assigned to a definite big hit).

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 90131, in the case of the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be varied (also referred to as a variation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, The 50 judgment values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to the 16R probability variation big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, the number (more specifically, 80) of the judgment values (“0” to “0”) are larger than the predetermined number. Values in the range of 79 ") are assigned to the 16R probability variation big hit. With such a setting, the second special view game is more likely to be a big hit by 16R than the first special view, so the game state is easy for the game ball to easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the high certainty base state (specifically, 70 revolutions after the big hit end), it is possible to increase the sense of expectation of becoming a 16 R probability variation big hit.

  In this embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, in the case of the second special figure game, it is more than the first special figure game. A small number of judgment values may be assigned to 2R probability variation big hits (probability). With such a setting, the second special figure game is less likely to be a 2R probability variation hit (probability) than the first special figure, so the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the 2R probability variation big hit (studging) which is difficult to obtain the winning balls, and to prevent the decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game.

  Further, the ROM 90101 stores a variation category determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that are different from each other in the type of variation category that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the determination ratio of each category, and the like. In the variation category determination table, each of the variation categories is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 'for determination of the variation category. Note that, instead of the plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 90101.

  Further, the ROM 90101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern as any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR5 'for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information on each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 90101.

  The RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 43 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source created partially or entirely on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the gaming control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data required to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like occurs (eg Process flag etc. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 49, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, etc. There is. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 49 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a common drawing reserve storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the first start winning occurs but has not been started yet The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the random number is made by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical value data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. is stored as reserved data (first special view reserved information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (eg “4”) Do.

  The second special figure reserve storage unit 90151 B is a special figure game that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906 B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 90151 B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of gaming balls) to the second start winning opening, and random number is generated by CPU 90103 based on the passage As numerical data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. as reserve data (second special view reserve information), storage is performed until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg “4”) Do.

  In addition, the hold data of the first special view game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special view hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special view game of the second special symbol display device 4B The holding data (second special-image holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common holding storage unit in association with the holding number.

  The common drawing reserve storage unit 90151C is a held data concerning a common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 although the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 Store information). For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151 C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 'for memory is stored as the reserved data (general drawing reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 indicates data indicating the flag value, the on state or the off state for each of the special processing process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, the big hit flag, etc. Data is stored. The high certainty flag is a flag indicating whether the state is the high certainty state or the low certainty state. The high base flag is a flag indicating whether the state is a high base state or a low base state. The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it is a big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, and the second special view hold storage number The second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, etc. It is memorized. In addition, the game control counter setting unit 90154 stores a stored value (a variable count value) and the like of the variable count counter (described later).

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 43 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 905, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124, an I / O 90125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 90126 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable role object) are executed by the effect control CPU 90120 executing the effect control program read from the ROM 90121. A process for controlling the rendering operation by 9017) is executed. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variation data write operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various change data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 90120 in the RAM 90122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive input of various signals from outside of the production control board 9012 via the I / O 90125 for the production control CPU 90120, I / O for the production control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The RTC circuit 90126 is a clocking means capable of clocking the current date and time, such as hour, minute, and second. The RTC circuit 90126 has a function of automatically adjusting the clock value to Japan Standard Time periodically using a radio-controlled clock. The RTC circuit 90126 operates by receiving power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is cut off. Timekeeping information by the RTC circuit 90126 is supplied to the effect control CPU 90120 and the like.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating a rendering image to the image display device 905, and a information signal (rendering sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control substrate 9013 are transmitted to the rendering control substrate 9012. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 9035A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 43 stores various data used to control the rendering operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations and settings.

  For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a holding etc. effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to determine whether to execute a holding etc. effect, a holding etc. effect pattern when it is determined to execute a holding etc. effect (for example, addition A hold etc. effect pattern determination table may be stored which is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display from time to time of the digestion.

  The ROM 90121 also includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable object 9017, etc.) Data to be configured is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. That is, various rendering operations are realized by setting a rendering control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The hold control, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during opening and the effect during closing), the ending effect and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 50A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable combination control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from data, and the contents of various effect control, switching timing of effect control, and the like may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. That is, determination values corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation are set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command has been received from the main substrate 9011 or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling an effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing or the like of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 909. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the push button 9031 B is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. The movable part control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable part 9017. That is, the movable part control data is data for specifying the operation of the movable part 9017. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 50 (B) is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control for displaying an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905 is performed. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 908 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 909 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data In the effective period, control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is performed to determine the contents of the effect. In addition, dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a rendering device that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 50 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or pattern data of the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, and the effect device (eg, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, advance the control of the movable part 9017 and the like). In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable combination control data # 1 to movable combination control data #n are respectively effects The control content of the rendering operation in the device is shown, and rendering control execution data # 1 to rendering control execution data #n for specifying the execution of rendering control are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the sound control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the feature control board 9016 and the like. For example, in the display control unit 90123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, a predetermined VDP, for example, reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in VRAM. Let Further, in the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 43 as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 51A includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. As a specific example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the effect process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, etc. Ru. In addition, each time the change is started (or every time when the value of the high probability flag and high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is changed) by notification from the main substrate 9011 side (specifically, ) By transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 9011), the value of the high probability flag or the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 may be updated, or the side of the main board 9011 Similarly, the values of the high probability flag and the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 may be updated by grasping the gaming state on the side of the effect control board 9012.

  The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. In addition, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 also stores data indicating the effect number count value which is a storage value of the effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reduction and the number of probability variation.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 51 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages are provided. . When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from main substrate 9011 to effect control substrate 9012. Specifically, one set of four commands (a first start opening winning notice command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a first pending storage number notifying command) or two commands (first start opening winning notice) The command and the first notification of the number of pending storages are sent from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 in one set. Among these commands sent from the main substrate 9011, the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A can store a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage number notification command, for each buffer number. A storage area for storing the symbol designation command, a storage area for storing the variation category command, and a storage area for storing the first pending storage number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 90120 associates the command received from the main substrate 9011 at the time of the first start winning combination with each set, and stores it in the storage area of the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A. For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 normally receives four commands (a first start opening prize notification command, a symbol designation command, a change category command, a first pending storage number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, free area Nothing is stored in any of the buffer number storage areas (storage areas for storing design designation commands, storage areas for storing variation category commands, and storage areas for storing the first pending storage count notification command) A symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage number notification command are stored in the respective storage areas of the buffer numbers. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is an empty area. The example shown in FIG. 51B represents a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of buffer numbers “1” to “3”. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90120 normally receives two commands (a first start opening winning notice command and a first hold storage number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, it stores the buffer number which is an empty area. An area (a storage area for storing a symbol designation command (storage area shown as "design designation" in FIG. 51B), a storage area for storing a variation category command ("variation category" in FIG. 51B) Storage area) and a storage area for storing the first pending storage count notification command (a storage area shown as "pending storage count notification" in FIG. 51B) (Storage area) stores the first pending storage number notification command. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the first pending storage count notification command is stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is an empty area.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 51 (B) are deleted one by one each time variable display of an ornamental symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special view game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relation of the buffer numbers). For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game in the storage state shown in FIG. 51 (B), the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “3” becomes buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B as shown in FIG. 51C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total pending storage number are provided. . When there is a start winning to the second start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from main substrate 9011 to effect control substrate 9012. Specifically, four commands (a second start opening winning notice command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 in one set. Ru. Among these commands sent from the main substrate 9011, the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B can store a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage number notification command, for each buffer number. A storage area for storing a symbol designation command, a storage area for storing a variation category command, and a storage area for storing a second pending storage number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 90120 associates the command received from the main substrate 9011 at the time of the second start winning with each set, and stores the command in the storage area of the second start winning received command buffer 90194B. For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 normally receives four commands (a second start opening prize notification command, a symbol designation command, a change category command, a second pending storage number notification command) at the time of the second start winning, free area 51. A storage area for buffer numbers (a storage area for storing a symbol designation command (a storage area shown as "design designation" in FIG. 51C), a storage area for storing a variation category command (FIG. 51C) Nothing is stored in any of the storage areas shown as "variable category" in and the storage area for storing the second pending storage number notification command (the storage area shown as "pending storage number notification" in FIG. 51 (C)) The design instruction command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command are stored in the respective storage areas of the buffer numbers which are not stored. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is an empty area. The example shown in FIG. 51C shows a state where commands are stored in storage areas of buffer numbers "1" to "2".

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B shown in FIG. 51C are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers). For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 51C, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to buffer number "1".

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting a first preread advance notice buffer 90194C as shown in FIG. 51D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the first start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A are provided in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C. That is, in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C, the contents of the determination regarding the read advance notice effect related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A of FIG. 51 (B) due to start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. In the first read advance notice buffer 90194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Also, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C.

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting a second preread notice buffer 90194D as shown in FIG. 51 (E) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the second start winning combination reception command buffer 90194 B are provided in the second preread notice buffer 90194D. That is, in the second preread notice buffer 90194D, the contents of the determination regarding the preread notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B of FIG. 51C, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second pre-read advance notice buffer 90194 D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Also, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the second prefetch notice buffer 90194D.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described.

  On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to make the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, and the second start opening via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by performing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). In the process of step S9012, for example, the CPU 90103 monitors the magnet sensor signal output from the magnet sensor, and turns on the error notification LED when the magnet sensor signal indicating an abnormal value is input from the magnet sensor. While notifying the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality, setting for transmitting the magnetic abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 9012 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes predetermined information output processing to, for example, the jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 And other data are output (step S9013).

  Following the information output process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a game random number update process (step S9014). In the gaming random number updating process of step S9014, for example, at least a part of gaming random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 'to MR5' etc.) used on the main substrate 9011 side is updated by software. As one example, the CPU 90103 may use software to update numerical data indicating game random numbers counted by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the game random number updating process of step S9014, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 904B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S9016). The normal symbol process processing is executed to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B Enables tilting operation setting and so on.

  Following the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 9011 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 90105, corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in game control buffer setting unit 90155, effect control After setting control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 9012, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S9015 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process performed in step S90101 of the special symbol process process (step S9015) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S90101) shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 90103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). If it is determined in step S90201 that the first starting opening switch 9022A is on (step S90201; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the first special view reservation storage number (the first special view game suspension number) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may identify the first special-image storage number by reading the first-storage number count value which is the storage value of the first-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90202 that the first special map storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90202; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer storage value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "1" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90207). Following the process of step S90207, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 55) (step S90208), and sets (clears) "0" to the start hole buffer value (step S90209).

  If it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is not on (step S90201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S90202 that the number of first special view storage locations has reached the upper limit (Step S90202 (YES)) After executing the processing of step S90209, the CPU 90103 receives a command from the second starting opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. It is determined based on the detection signal whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203). If it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the second special view reserve storage number (the number of reserve for the second special view game) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90204). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special-image storage number by reading the second-storage number count, which is the storage value of the second-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90204 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90204; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer stored value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "2" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90210). Following the processing of step S90210, the CPU 90103 executes start winning processing (FIG. 55) (step S90211), sets (clears) "0" to the starting opening buffer value (step S90212), and determines start winning processing Finish.

  When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90204 that the number of second special view storage locations has reached the upper limit value. (Step S90204 (YES)), the processing of steps S90210, S90211 and S90212 is not performed, and the start winning determination processing is ended.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 54, even if the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 90103 first updates the number of to-be-saved special-character storages according to the starting opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S90215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S90215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S90216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated so as to add one.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90216, the CPU 90103 determines the random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result, the big hit type among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 90104 and the game control counter setting unit 90154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 'for random number and the random number value MR3' for variable category determination are extracted (step S90217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view storage section 90151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as storage information (step S90218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ is set in first special image storage unit 90151A, while the starting opening buffer value is “2”. At the same time, numerical data representing random number values MR1 'to MR3' is set in second special image storage section 90151B.

  Following the process of step S90218, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning notice command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 9012 (step S90219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning notification command is performed. For example, the command command processing (step S9017) of the timer control processing for game control shown in FIG. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90219, the CPU 90103 executes a winning-time random number value determination process (step S90220). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command (step S90221). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second holding storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process ends. In addition, for example, the command control process (step S9017) of the timer control process for game control shown in FIG. 52 is executed after the special symbol process process is finished, for example, the pending storage number notification command set in step S90221 is executed. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart etc. which show an example of random number value determination processing (step S90220) at the time of winning. In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 56A, the CPU 90103 first specifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S90401). In the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is confirmed by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is in the on state, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when in the off state). . Also, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state or the low probability state by confirming the state of the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Good. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state when the high probability flag is on, and identifies the low probability state when the high probability flag is not on (when it is off). May be

  Following the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a big hit gaming state is currently in progress (step S90402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified in the process of step S90401 that the jackpot gaming state. If it is determined in step S90402 that the player is not in the big hit gaming state (step S90402; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether it is in the high base state (step S90403). In other words, it is determined whether or not the high base state is identified in the process of step S90401.

  If it is determined in step S90402 that a big hit gaming state is determined (step S90402; YES), or if it is determined in step S90403 that a high base state is found (step S90403; YES), the CPU 90103 indicates the starting opening buffer value. Is "2" (step S90404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning combination (the start winning combination where the variation special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S90404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90403 that the high base state is not set (step S90403 (NO)) or if it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90404 (YES)), The CPU 90103 sets (selects) the special view display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90405). Specifically, when the CPU 90103 is not in the high certainty state, according to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 47, the table data for the low certainty state (the value of the range of “8000” to “8189” is “big hit” The table data assigned to the special view display result is set, and when it is in the high probability state, the table data for the high probability state (“8000” to “8818” is displayed from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special view display result whose range value is “big hit” is set In addition, when the high probability flag is in the on state, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state and the high probability flag If it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as the low certainty state, and the first special figure and the second special figure are different. When the display result determination table (first special view display result determination table, second special view display result determination table) is used, the first special view display result determination table is displayed when the starting opening buffer value is “1”. If it is used and the start port buffer value is "2", the second special view display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90405, the CPU 90103 enters within the predetermined jackpot determination range the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90103 shows numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ and individual determination values assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405. The comparison is made to determine the presence / absence of a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 '. Alternatively, CPU 90103 is the minimum value of the judgment value assigned to the special view display result of “big hit” in the numerical data indicating random number value MR1 ′ and the special view display result determination table data set in step S90405 (lower limit The value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S90406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; YES), the random number value MR2 'for jackpot type determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. Based on the numerical data shown, it is determined the jackpot type (step S90407). Specifically, first, CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified by the starting opening buffer value. Set (select) the big hit classification decision table. Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets table data according to the variation special figure from the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 compares, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type with the determination value of each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table data set according to the variation special view, etc. Then, the jackpot type matching the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 'may be determined.

  Following the process of step S90407, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90407 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S90406; NO), setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90409). It should be noted that the symbol designation command set in step S90409 is executed mainly by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

After executing the process of step S90408 or the process of step S90409, the CPU 90103 determines whether the high base state is set (step S90410). The process in step S90410 is executed in the following four scenes (scene 1 to scene 4).
(Scene 1)
A scene that is not the jackpot gaming state and is the low base state (when step S90402 (NO), step S90403 (NO)). In addition, even if it is the first start winning (starting winning where the variation special figure is the first special drawing), there may be the second starting winning (start winning where the variation special figure is the second special drawing). (Scene 2)
A scene where there is a second starting winning combination not in the jackpot gaming state and in the high base state (when step S90402 (NO), step S90403 (YES), step S90404 (YES)).
(Scene 3)
If there is a second start winning in the jackpot gaming state and the low base state (step S90402 (YES), when it becomes step S90404 (YES)).
(Scene 4)
When it is a big hit game state and there is a 2nd starting winning combination in the high base state (Step S90402 (YES), Step S90404 (when it becomes YES)).

  If it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not set (step S90410; NO), that is, if the scene 1 or the scene 3 described above, the CPU 90103 is for the low base state according to the special view display result. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S90411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is present (step S90410; YES), that is, if the scene 2 or the scene 4 is present, the CPU 90103 selects the high base state according to the special view display result. Set (select) a variation category determination table for (step S90412).

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 57A shows a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among the plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 57 (A), when the special map display result is “loss” in the low base state, three types of variation category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C One of the variation category determination tables is selected from-TBL2 and "C-TBL3". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57A, when the number of pending storages is 0 or 1, the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected, and when the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, The variation category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected. When the number of pending storages is four, the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 57 (A), when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the low base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL4" in the figure is used regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 57B is a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among the plurality of variation category determination tables when in the high base state. According to FIG. 57 (B), when the special map display result is “loss” in the high base state, two types of variation category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C One of the variation category determination tables is selected from -TBL3 "). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when the number of pending storages is 0 or 1, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” is selected, and when the number of pending storages is 2 to 4. The variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 57 (B), when the special figure display result is set as “big hit” in the high base state, one type of variation category determination table (“C-TBL5” in the figure is selected regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a change category determination table. FIG. 58A shows the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B. The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 58A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 58B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. The same applies to the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D) and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” of FIG. Values) are assigned to multiple types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 58A, 0 out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3 ′ are varied The category “PA1 ′” is allocated, and 70 (values in the range of “0” to “69”) are allocated to the variation category “PA2 ′”, and 27 (values in the range of “70” to “96”) Are assigned to the variation category “PA3 ′”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4 ′”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Assigned to ''. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 58A, the variation category “PA1 ′” is 0% (0 (100), and the variation category “PA2 ′” is 70% (70 ÷ 100). ), The variation category “PA3 ′” is 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4 ′” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5 ′” is 1% (1 ÷ 100). Be done.

  FIG. 58 (B) shows the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" shown in the diagram of FIG. 57 (A). In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” of FIG. 58 (B), four (values in the range of “0” to “3”) of the 100 determination values of the random number MR3 ′ are variation Assigned to category "PA1 '", 85 (values in the range of "4" to "88") are assigned to variation category "PA2'", eight (values in the range of "89" to "96") Are assigned to the variation category “PA3 ′”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4 ′”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Assigned to ''. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 58 (B), the variation category “PA1 ′” is 4%, the variation category “PA2 ′” is 85%, and the variation category “PA3 ′” is 8 %, The variation category "PA4 '" is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1%.

  FIG. 58 (C) is a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” shown in the diagrams of FIG. 57 (A) and FIG. 57 (B). In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” of FIG. 58C, 64 (values in the range of “0” to “63”) out of 100 of the determined values of the random number MR3 ′ are varied The category "PA1" is assigned, and 25 (values in the range of "64" to "88") are assigned to the variation category "PA2 '", and 8 (values in the range of "89" to "96") Are assigned to the variation category “PA3 ′”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4 ′”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Assigned to ''. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 58C, the variation category “PA1 ′” is 64%, the variation category “PA2 ′” is 25%, and the variation category “PA3 ′” is 8 %, The variation category "PA4 '" is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation category "PA5'" at a rate of 1%.

  FIG. 58 (D) shows the variation category determination table "C-TBL4" shown in the diagram of FIG. 57 (A). In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 58D, 10 (values in the range of “0” to “9”) out of 100 of the determined values of the random number MR3 ′ are varied The category "PB1" is assigned, and 50 (values in the range of "10" to "59") are assigned to the variation category "PB3", and 30 (values in the range of "60" to "89") Are assigned to the variation category "PB4 '", and ten (values in the range of "90" to "99") are assigned to the variation category "PB5'". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 58D, the variation category “PB1 ′” is 10%, the variation category “PB3 ′” is 50%, and the variation category “PB4 ′” is 30. %, Variation category "PB5 '" is determined at a rate of 10%.

  FIG. 58 (E) shows the variation category determination table "C-TBL5" shown in the diagram of FIG. 57 (B). In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” of FIG. 58 (E), 60 (values in the range of “0” to “59”) are varied out of 100 of the determined values of the random number MR3 ′. The category "PB1" is allocated, 20 (values in the range of "60" to "79") are allocated to the variation category "PB3", and 10 (values in the range of "80" to "89") Are assigned to the variation category "PB4 '", and ten (values in the range of "90" to "99") are assigned to the variation category "PB5'". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” in FIG. 58E, the variation category “PB1 ′” is 60%, the variation category “PB3 ′” is 20%, and the variation category “PB4 ′” is 10 %, Variation category "PB5 '" is determined at a rate of 10%.

  Comparing FIG. 57 (A) with FIG. 57 (B), when the gaming state is the low base state and the special view display result is “loss”, the number of pending storages is “2” or “3” While the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" is determined, when the gaming state is the high base state and the special view display result is "loss", the number of pending memories is "2" or "3". Sometimes, the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is determined. In addition, comparing the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” with the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, the percentage of determination of the variation category “PA1” is 4%. On the other hand, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the percentage of determination of the variation category “PA1 ′” is 64%. That is, when the gaming state is the high base state, the determination ratio of the variation category "PA1 '" in the case of the number of pending storages "2" or "3" is higher than when the gaming state is the low base state.

  Further, comparing FIG. 57 (A) with FIG. 57 (B), when the gaming state is the low base state and the special view display result is “big hit”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” is determined. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high base state and the special figure display result is "big hit", the variation category determination table "C-TBL5" is determined. Further, comparing the variation category determination table "C-TBL4" with the variation category determination table "C-TBL5", the determination category of the variation category "PB1 '" is 10% in the variation category determination table "C-TBL4" On the other hand, in the variation category determination table "C-TBL5", the percentage of determination of the variation category "PB1 '" is 60%. That is, when the gaming state is the high base state, the determination ratio of the variation category "PB1 '" is set higher than when the gaming state is the low base state.

  Further, in the setting example of FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, when the special map display result is “loss”, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA1 ′” when the number of pending storages is large compared to when the number of pending storages is small. Is high. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state and the special view display result is "loss", the variation category in the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" selected when the number of pending memories is "4" "PA1 '" determination ratio "64%"> the number of pending storage "3" or "2" The selection ratio of the fluctuation category "PA1'" in the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL2" "4% It is assumed that the determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1 ′” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the number of pending storages is “0” or “1”. Also, for example, when the gaming state is the high base state and the special view display result is "loss", the variation category determination table "C" selected when the number of held memories is "2" to "4" -The change category "PA 1 '" in the change category determination table "C-TBL1" selected when the determination ratio "64%" of the change category "PA1'" in TBL3> the number of pending storage "0" or "1" The percentage of decisions is “0%”.

  Moreover, in the setting example of FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, when the special map display result is "loss", the variation category (variation category "PA4 '") of the super reach (loss), regardless of the number of pending storages Alternatively, the determination ratio of the variation category "PA5 '") is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA5 ′” has a determination ratio “1%”, and the variation category “PA4 "2%" is the percentage of decisions made for ''.

  Further, in the setting example of FIG. 58A to FIG. 58C, the same (common) fluctuation is used in any of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” to the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL3”. A decision value of random number value MR3 'is made to exist corresponding to the category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random number MR3 ′ is a certain value, the same variation category is determined in any of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”. There is.

  For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 'is "99", the variation category "PA5'" is determined regardless of which of the variation category determination tables "C-TBL1" to "C-TBL3". I have to. In addition, when the determined value of the random number MR3 ′ is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” may be any variation category “table”. PA4 'is to be determined. In addition, when the determined value of the random number MR3 ′ is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” may be any of the variation category “table”. "PA3 '" is to be determined. In addition, when the determined value of the random number MR3 ′ is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” may be any of the variation category “table”. "PA2 '" is to be determined. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 ′ is a certain value (value of each range described above), it will be a reach, a super reach, a super reach α or a super reach β, It can be easily determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to notify them of the variable display corresponding to the start winning, etc., and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, when the determined value of the random number MR3 'is a value in the range of "0" to "69", any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" , And the variation category "PA1 '" or "PA2'" is determined. In this way, it is possible to easily determine in advance at least that it is not a reach.

  It returns to FIG. 56 (A). In the process of step S90411 executed when it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not set, the CPU 90103 changes based on the special view display result and the number of pending storages according to the selection example shown in FIG. Select any of the change category determination tables from among the category determination table "C-TBL1", the change category determination table "C-TBL2", the change category determination table "C-TBL3", and the change category determination table "C-TBL4" Then, set table data constituting the selected variation category determination table. Specifically, when it is determined in step S90406 that the special view display result is "big hit", the CPU 90103 constructs the variation category determination table "C-TBL4" shown in FIG. 58 (D). Set table data. Further, when it is determined in step S90406 that the special map display result is "loss", the CPU 103 configures the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" when the number of pending storages is "0" or "1". Set the table data to be stored, and set the table data constituting the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" when the number of pending storages is "2" or "3", set the variation category determination table "when the number of pending storages is" 4 " Table data which constitutes "C-TBL3" is set.

  Further, in the process of step S90412 executed when it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is set, the CPU 90103 follows the selection example shown in FIG. One of the variation category determination tables is selected from the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5”, and the selected variation category determination table Set the table data that make up Specifically, when it is determined in step S90406 that the special view display result is "big hit", the CPU 90103 constructs the variation category determination table "C-TBL5" shown in FIG. Set table data. If CPU 90103 determines in step S90406 that the special map display result is "loss", the number of pending storages "0" or "1" forms variation category determination table "C-TBL1". The table data to be set is set, and when the number of pending storages is "2" to "4", the table data constituting the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is set.

  In the process of step S90411, it has been described that the CPU 90103 sets the variation category determination table for the low base state according to the special view display result, but as described above, the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", variation The category determination table "C-TBL2" and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" are variation category determination tables for low base states according to "loss", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL4" It is a change category determination table for a low base state according to the "big hit". In the process of step S90412, although it has been described that the CPU 90103 sets the variation category determination table for the high base state according to the special view display result, the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" and the variation category determination table "C" “TBL3” is a variation category determination table for high base status according to “loss”, and a variation category determination table “C-TBL5” is a variation category determination table for high base status according to “big hit” is there. That is, the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" are also variation category determination tables for low base states according to "loss", and the high base states according to "loss" It is also a change category determination table for

  After executing the process of step S90411 or the process of step S90412, the CPU 90103 determines (determines) a fluctuation category based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'for fluctuation category determination (step S90413). Specifically, CPU 90103 sets numerical data indicating random number value MR3 'for change category determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. 55 and the change set in step S90411 or step S90412. It is only necessary to determine which one of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 ′ by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the category determination table.

  Following the process of step S90413, the CPU 90103 transmits one of the fluctuation category commands shown in FIG. 56B to the effect control board 9012 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S90413. After setting for setting (step S90414), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S90101), the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 .

  The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is processing to be executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". The special symbol normal processing includes processing of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is a process that is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "1". The fluctuation pattern setting process is a process of determining the fluctuation pattern based on the variable display result or the like previously determined in the special symbol normal process (step S90110), the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the first fluctuation start command It includes a setting process and the like for transmitting (or the second change start command). In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is a process executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process is a process of causing the special symbol to be varied (variable display) in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and an elapsed time after the start of variation is a special figure variation time (FIG. 46) It includes the process of determining whether or not it has reached. In the special symbol variation processing, when the elapsed time after the start of variation reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process in step S90113 is a process that is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the process of stopping (deriving) the confirmed special symbol is displayed or the big hit flag is turned off. A process for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a process to be executed in the case where the game is executed (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result in the special symbol normal process (step S90110) is "miss") As a process to be executed when is in the on state (if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, it includes a setting process etc. for sending a hit start designation command (fanfare command) . In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the big hit flag is on, the special process process flag Update the value of to "4".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is processing to be executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process that performs setting for opening the big winning opening (for example, setting of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the big winning opening door for opening the big winning opening, etc.) , And a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing in step S90115 is a processing that is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time or whether the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023 has reached a predetermined number, etc. A process of determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closing state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 9082 for the winning opening door for closing the big winning opening It includes a process of setting a solenoid drive signal and the like, a setting process of transmitting a notification command and the like after opening the special winning opening, and the like. In the big hit open processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The big hit opening post process of step S90116 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is “6”. The big hit opening post-processing is processing to determine whether or not the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number of times, or when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value has not been reached The process to be executed includes a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command, and a setting process for transmitting a hit ending designation command as a process to be executed when the special winning opening opening frequency reaches the maximum value. It is. In the big hit opening post processing, when the number of rounds execution has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when reaching the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value Update the value of the special drawing process flag to "7".

  The big hit end process of step S90117 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is "7". The big hit end process is a process of determining whether or not the big hit end production waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending production) has elapsed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed This includes processing for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the high probability high base state, processing for setting the number of times of ST, and the number of times of time saving. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  In the big hit open process (step S90115), the big hit open post process (step S90116), the big hit open pre process (step S90114), the big hit end process (step S90117), when the count switch 9023 turns on The transmission setting for transmitting the mouth winning notice command is included.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol processing (step S90110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 59, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (step S90231). That is, the CPU 90103 determines whether the second special view game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S90231, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  If it is determined in step S90231 that the number of second special figure reservations is not "0" (step S90231; NO), the CPU 90103 selects the first special number from the second special figure suspension storage unit 90151B from "1". The reserved data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 'for display result determination, the random number MR2' for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 'for variation category determination are read out and temporarily stored (step S90232). That is, when there is a hold (hold data) of the second special view game, the CPU 90103 holds the second special view hold storage unit as the hold data of the variation regardless of whether the first special view game is hold or not. Read the numerical data corresponding to the hold number “1” of 90151 B (the earliest (oldest) hold data of the second special view game extracted in step S 90217) and temporarily store it in the random number buffer for variation, etc. .

  Subsequent to the process of step S90232, the CPU 90103 subtracts one from the second special view reserve storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 (see FIG. 49), and the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B (figure 49) is shifted (step S90233). Specifically, in the process of step S90233, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the second hold storage count value, and an entry lower than the hold number "1" in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B (for example, the hold number). The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90233, the CPU 90103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage number count value. Following the process of step S90233, the CPU 90103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step S90234).

  If it is determined in step S90231 that the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S90231; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the number of first special views pending storage is "0" or not. It determines (step S90235). That is, the CPU 90103 determines whether the first special view game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S90235, the game control counter setting unit 90154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. Just do it.

  If it is determined in step S90235 that the number of first special view reservations is not "0" (step S90235; NO), the CPU 90103 selects the first special view suspension storage unit 90151A from the hold number "1". The reserved data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 'for display result determination, the random number MR2' for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 'for variation category determination are read out and temporarily stored (step S90236). That is, when the CPU 90103 does not hold the second special view game (hold data) (step S90231 (YES)) and the first special view game is held, the CPU 90103 holds the change as the hold data. The numerical data corresponding to the hold number “1” of the first special view hold storage unit 90151A (the earliest (oldest) hold data of the first special view game extracted in step S90217) is read out and the random number buffer for variation Temporarily store in etc.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the first special view reserve storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 (see FIG. 49), and the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A (figure 49) is shifted (step S90237). Specifically, in the process of step S90237, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the first pending storage number count value, and an entry lower than the pending number "1" in the first special view pending storage unit 90151A (for example, the pending number) The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90237, the CPU 90103 may decrement the total pending storage number count value by one. Subsequent to the process of step S90237, the CPU 90103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step S90238).

  As described above, the processing of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, so the first special view game and the second special view are executed. When the game is on hold, the second special view game is executed prior to the first special view game. In addition, it is not limited to the aspect in which the second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game, and the game ball enters (passes through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) ) And the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winning prize (first start prize, second start prize) occurs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine from the stored data which one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed.

  After executing the process of step S90234 or the process of step S90238, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special-image display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90239). For example, the CPU 90103 may set the special view display result determination table as in step S90405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 56 (A). When using different display result determination tables (the first special view display result determination table and the second special view display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S90405, the starting opening buffer Although the value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, in the process of step S90239, the variation special feature designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes the special drawing based on the numerical data indicating the special drawing display result determination random number value MR1 ′ stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special drawing display result determination table set in step S90239. The display result is determined (step S90240). In the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 sets the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1 'and the process of step S90239 as in step S90406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. The special chart display result (“big hit” or “miss”) is made by comparing each determination value individually assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special chart display result determination table data. What should I decide?

  Following the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 determines whether the special-image display result determined in step S90240 is a "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined in step S90241 that the game is a "big hit" (step S90241; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the on state (step S90242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S90117. Following the process of step S90242, the CPU 90103 executes a big hit type determination process (S90244). The jackpot type determination process of step S90244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S90407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 56 (A). Following the jackpot type determination process of step S90244, the CPU 90103 is, for example, a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S90244. A big hit type buffer value is set (step S90245). That is, it stores what the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S 90244 is. As an example, the CPU 90103 sets "1" in the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process of step S90244 is "16R positive variation big hit", and if "8R positive variation big hit", the big hit type Set "2" to the buffer value.

  If it is determined in step S 90241 that the game is not a "big hit" (step S 90241 (NO)) or after the process of step S 90245 is executed, the CPU 90103 further determines whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. In response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, the set special symbol is set (step S90248). Following the process of step S90248, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special drawing process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and ends the special symbol normal process.

  When it is determined in step S90235 that the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" (step S90235; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S90250) is executed, and the special symbol is displayed. End normal processing. In the demonstration display setting of step S90250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 905 is from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 It is determined whether or not it has been sent. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S90111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the big hit flag is in the on state (step S90250). That is, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S90110). When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S90250; YES), of the effect control command (display result designated command) according to the big hit type (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit) determined in step S90244 Transmission setting is performed (step S90251). If it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S90250; NO), transmission setting of the effect control command (display result specification command) indicating that the player is lost is performed (step S90252).

  After executing the processing of step S90251 or the processing of step S90252, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the high base state is established (step S90253). If it is determined in step S90253 that the base state is not the high base state (step S90253; NO), the CPU 90103 determines the low according to the special image display result as in step S90411 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220). A variation category determination table for the base state is set (selected) (step S90254). That is, when the big hit flag is not in the on state, the CPU 90103 changes the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" or the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" according to the number of pending storages. When the big hit flag is in the on state, the variation category determination table "C-TBL4" is set.

  If it is determined in step S90253 that the base is in the high base state (step S90253; YES), the CPU 90103 determines the height according to the special view display result as in step S90412 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220). A variation category determination table for the base state is set (selected) (step S90255). That is, when the big hit flag is not in the on state, the CPU 90103 sets either the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” according to the number of pending storages, and the big hit When the flag is in the on state, the variation category determination table "C-TBL5" is set.

  After executing the process of step S90254 or the process of step S90255, CPU 90103 is based on numerical data indicating random number value MR3 'for variation category determination, as in step S90413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220). To determine the variation category (step S90256).

  Following the process of step S90256, the CPU 90103 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation category determined in step S90256 and the random value MR5 'for fluctuation pattern determination (step S90257). In the process of step S90257, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category determined in step S90256, and the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR5 'is any variation The variation pattern may be determined based on whether it is within the range of the pattern.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern determination table. In the process of step S90257, when the CPU 90103 determines the fluctuation category "PA2 '" in step S90256, for example, the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category "PA2'" shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 'for setting (selecting) and changing the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "0" to "39", the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" is determined, and "40" to " When it is in the range of 99 ", the fluctuation pattern" PA2'-2 "is determined. Also, for example, when the CPU 90103 determines the fluctuation category “PA3 ′” in step S90256, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category “PA3 ′” illustrated in FIG. 61C. When the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 'for determining the fluctuation pattern is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" is determined, and the range of "80" to "99" is determined. When it exists, the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-2" is determined. The same applies to the case where another variation category is determined in step S90256.

  The random number value MR5 'for variation pattern determination may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, or in the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211) as in the case of the random number value MR3' for variation category determination. It may be extracted in step S90217 and used as reserve data, and may be read out in step S90232 (or step S90236) of the special symbol processing (step S90110).

  Subsequent to the process of step S90257, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the effect control command (variation pattern specification command) according to the determined fluctuation pattern (step S90258). In addition to the fluctuation pattern designation command, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command specifying the start of the second special figure game) specifying the start of the first special figure game. You may Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets a special figure fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern to the special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153 (step S90259), and the value of the special drawing process flag Is updated to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S90112) (step S90260), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. When the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" in step S90260, the special symbol variation process is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing (step S90113). In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 62, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the flag under special view determination display is on (step S90291). The flag for displaying the special figure finalization flag is provided, for example, in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. The special figure final display flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S90295 in response to the final display of the final special symbol which is the variable display result in the special view game.

  When the special figure final display flag is off at step S90291 (step S90291; NO), the CPU 90103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the final special symbol (step S90292). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol determination designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S90293). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the special view finalized display time which is the stop display time of the finalized special symbol (step S90294). Specifically, CPU 90103 sets a predetermined special figure determination display time as a timer initial value of the special figure determination display time timer value which is a storage value of the special figure determination display time timer provided in game control timer setting unit 90153. Just set it. In this embodiment, the time related to the fluctuation pattern is the special drawing fluctuation time, and the special drawing determination display time is a time not related to the fluctuation pattern (for example, a fixed time). The special view determination display time may be a time related to the variation pattern. For example, assuming that the total time of the special figure fluctuation time and the special figure determination display time corresponds to the fluctuation pattern, the timer initial value of the special figure fluctuation time timer and the timer initial value of the special figure determination display time timer according to the fluctuation pattern May be set.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90294, the CPU 90103 sets the flag under special view confirmation display to the on state (step S90295), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

  If it is determined in step S90291 that the special figure determination display flag is on (step S90291; YES), it is determined whether the special figure determination display time has elapsed (step S90296). In the process of step S90296, for example, it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S90294 has timed out (whether the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). . If the special figure determination display time has not elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; NO), the special symbol stop process is ended, and the process waits until the special figure determination display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure determination display time has elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; YES), the special figure determination display flag is cleared to make the off state (step S90297), and then it is determined whether the big hit flag is on or not. It is determined (S90298). If the big hit flag is on (step S90298; YES), the big hit start time waiting time is set (step S90299). Specifically, a predetermined big hit start waiting time as a timer initial value of the big hit start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit start waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153 Just set it.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90299, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 (step S90300). For example, in the process of step S90300, setting data indicating a storage address in the ROM 90101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command according to the big hit type buffer value is a send command in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Following the process of step S90300, the CPU 90103 sets a big hit start time flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like to an on state (step S90302). The big hit start flag is a flag that is referred to in the big hit opening pre-processing (step S90114). The CPU 90103 executes the big hit opening pre-processing before the start of each round, but is a flag that determines whether or not it is before the first round (first round) by the big hit start flag. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time saving state or the probability changing state (step S90303). In the process of step S90303, for example, the CPU 90103 may clear each of the high probability flag and the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 and set it in the off state. Note that when the low-probability low-base state has already been reached, the process of step S90303 may be omitted.

  Following the process of step S90303, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is performed (step S90304). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. In this embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state does not change even when the game state changes, but when the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state or the probability change state to the normal state) The game state designation command may be transmitted only when the change occurs. In the effect control board 9012 side, the current gaming state is specified (including the specification that the gaming state has changed) from the contents of the gaming state designating command transmitted from the main board 9011, but in the gaming state designating command Alternatively, the current game state may be specified by receiving a hit start designation command. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S90304 or the like. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S90305), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S90298 (step S90298; NO), it is determined whether the time saving state or the probability changing state is ended (step S90306). In the process of step S90306, the CPU 90103 executes, for example, the following process. First, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability low base state, and if it is not a low probability low base state, adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter. The fluctuation number counter is the number of times the special drawing game has been executed after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the number of times ST (number of probability variations) or the number of time reductions. The number of times of ST (the number of times of definite variation) is the number of times of execution of the variable display game which executes the definite variation control. The time saving number is the number of times of execution of the variable display game for executing the time saving control. The number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of times of time reduction are set in the big hit end process (step S90117). The CPU 90103, which adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation counter, compares the value of the fluctuation counter after adding 1 with the ST count, and if the value of the fluctuation counter is greater than the ST count, the gaming state is low and low The base state may be set (the high certainty flag and the high base flag may be cleared), and the number of times of ST and the set value of the time saving number may be cleared to “0”. In this embodiment, since the number of time savings and the number of STs are the same (both 70 times), the value of the variation number counter after one addition may be compared with the number of times reduced. In addition, when the number of times of time saving and the number of times of ST are different, each may be compared individually. That is, the CPU 90103 compares the value of the variation counter after one addition with the number of time reductions, and sets the low base state if the value of the variation counter is larger than the number of time reductions, and the variation counter after one addition And the number of times of ST may be compared, and when the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the number of times of ST, the state of low probability may be set.

  Following the process of step S90306, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is performed (step S90307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. In this embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state does not change even when the game state changes, but when the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state or the probability change state to the normal state) The game state designation command may be transmitted only when the change occurs. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the current gaming state is specified (including the specification that the gaming state has changed) from the contents of the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead, the main The present gaming state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is performed on the side of the effect control board 9012 independently of the side of the board 9011. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S90307 or the like. Thereafter, the special figure process flag is cleared, and the value thereof is initialized to "0" (step S90308), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process (step S90117). In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S90311). As an example, in the big hit opening post process (step S90116) shown in FIG. 53, when updating the value of the special process process flag to “7”, a timer initial determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time A value is set to the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S90311, the CPU 90103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not it is.

  If it is determined in step S90311 that the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed (step S90311; NO), the CPU 90103 ends the jackpot end processing as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90311 that the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S90311; YES), the CPU 90103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (step S90312). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the on state to set it in the high probability state (probable state) (step S90314). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the high base provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the high base state by turning it on (step S90315). That is, by the processing of step S90314 and step S90315, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to the high probability high base state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90315, the CPU 90103 sets the set value of the number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) to 70 times (step S90316), and sets the time reduction number to 70 times (step S90317). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter which is compared with the number of times of ST and the number of time reductions to "0" (step S90318) and clears (resets) the big hit flag to off state (step S90319). The value of the process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90320), and the big hit end processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, although the set value of the ST number of times (the number of definite variations) and the set value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both 70 times), the set value of the number of STs (number of probable variations) and the time reduction number The number of times may be different from the setting value of 70 times. Further, in this embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hits and the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variations) in 16R probability variation big hits are the same value (both 70 times) However, the set value of the number of STs (the number of probability variations) in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (the number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit may be different values. Moreover, in this embodiment, the setting value of the number of time savings in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the number of time shortening in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both 70 times). The set value of the number of time savings may be different from the set value of the number of times reduced for the 16R probability variation big hit. If the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 is “1”, the CPU 90103 determines that it is a 16R probability variation big hit, and the big hit type buffer value is “2”. You may judge that it is 8R probability variation big hit. In addition, when the set value of ST number (number of probability changes) and time reduction number do not differ between the case of 8R probability variation big hit and 16R probability variation big hit (when the same value is used), the process of step S90312 (big hit type The reading of the buffer value) may be omitted.

  Next, various images displayed on the image display device 905 will be described. On the side of the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control main process (described later) to perform various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable role object 9017, etc.) The presentation operation using) is performed.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various images displayed on the image display device 905. In FIG. 64A, image data (image name) and layers for displaying each image corresponding to various effects (one example) executed in the display area of the image display device 905 are set (each image It is the figure which illustrated Z value). FIG. 64 (B) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. In FIG. 64 (B), the numbers on the Z axis are Z values.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), when executing a display effect such as on hold (hold effect, active display effect), a display image such as on hold is displayed. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the display effect such as the hold operation using the display image such as the hold operation. As shown in FIG. 64 (B), the hold etc. display image includes the first hold display image G1, the second hold display image G2, and the active display image G3. The display time of the first hold display image G1 or the second hold display image G2 varies depending on the number of the hold display, the digestion time of each hold display (display time of the variable display of each decorative symbol), and the like. The display time of the active display image G3 differs depending on the display time of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the like. Note that the hold etc. display image may include an image showing the active display area AHA. The Z value of the hold etc. display image is “0”.

  Further, when the chance zone effect (effect determined in the chance zone effect determination process of FIG. 71 described later; one mode of the advance notice effect) is executed, the chance zone effect image is displayed. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the chance zone effect using the chance zone effect image. The chance zone effect image includes a character image G4 as shown in FIG. 64 (B). The display time of the character image G4 (execution time of the chance zone effect) differs depending on the number of the hold display, the digestion time of each hold display, and the like. Further, the display mode of the character image G4 includes an operation mode in which the character is operating and a stationary mode in which the character is stationary. The Z value of the chance zone effect image is “1”.

  Further, when the variable display effect (rendering effect) is executed, the variable display effect image is displayed. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the variable display effect using the variable display effect image. The variable display effect image includes a decorative pattern image G5 as shown in FIG. The display mode of the decorative symbol image G5 includes an aspect in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed and an aspect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display time of the decorative symbol during the variable display (variable display time of the decorative symbol) differs depending on the fluctuation pattern and the like. The Z value of the decorative symbol image is "2".

  The Z value will be described. The RAM 90122 stores a Z value setting table in which the Z value of each image is set. The Z value indicates a layer that displays an image. As the Z value is smaller, the image is displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction, and as the Z value is larger, the back side in the depth direction (back side, lower side) The image is displayed on the layer of. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the display image of pending etc. of Z value "0" is displayed on the top (uppermost) layer, and the chance zone effect image of Z value "1" is the second from the top The variable display effect image of the Z value “2” is displayed on the third layer from the top. That is, the chance zone effect image of Z value “1” is displayed on the layer on the back of the display image of the hold etc. of Z value “0”, and the layer on the back of the chance zone effect image of Z value “1” The variable display effect image of the Z value “2” is displayed. Since an image having a small Z value is displayed on the front side of an image having a large Z value, an image having a small Z value has a display priority higher than an image having a large Z value. In addition, the above-mentioned image and Z value are examples. For example, the Z value of the background (background image) may be “3”. Furthermore, hereinafter, an X image of Z value “N” may be referred to as an X image having Z value “N”.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute an effect control main process as shown in FIG. 65.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and mounts it on the effect control board 9012. Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S9072; NO), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 occurs separately from the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, control to be an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When it is determined in step S9072 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag to be in the off state (step S9073), The command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  Following the command analysis process of step S9074, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process (step S9075). In the error notification processing in step S 9075, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is performed for an act of causing the game ball to be illegally guided to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process of step S 9075, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control process process (step S 9076). In the effect control process of step S 9076, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable role object 9017, etc.) are used based on the effect control command etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011. Judgment, determination, setting, and the like related to the rendering operation are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S9076, the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect random number updating process (step S9077). In the effect random number updating process of step S9077, for example, at least a part of effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 9012 is updated by software. As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 may use software to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S9072.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 9011 has been described as an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a rendering control command or the like may be generated in response to an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart of an example of the command analysis process (step S9074). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 90120 first receives the command from the main substrate 9011 transmitted via the relay substrate 9015 by confirming the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90501). If it is determined that there is no reception command (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that there is a reception command (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502). . The effect control CPU 90120 may check, for example, MODE data of the received command, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 44).

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90503). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set an initial timer value predetermined as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning notification command (step S90502; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the second starting opening winning notification command. Step S90504. If it is determined in step S90504 that the command is the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a second pending storage number notification waiting time (step S90505). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set, in the command reception control timer, a timer initial value predetermined as a reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command.

  If it is determined in step S90504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step S90506). ). If it is determined in step S90506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a variation category command (step S90507). If it is determined in step S90507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S90507; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S90508). ). If it is determined in step S90508 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90509).

  If it is determined in step S90508 that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the second pending storage number notification command. (Step S90510). If it is determined in step S90510 that the command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S90510; YES), the second pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90511).

  When it is determined in step S90506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S90506 (YES)), or when it is determined in step S90507 that it is a variation category command (step S90507 (YES)), step S90503, step S90505, After executing any of the processes in steps S90509 and S90511, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the reception command in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A or in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B. It stores in the vacant area in (step S90512). Specifically, when the reception command is the first starting opening winning notice command or the starting opening winning notice command immediately before the receiving command is the first starting opening winning notice command, the effect control CPU 90120 In the case (when the second starting opening winning notification command is not received after receiving the first starting opening winning notification command), the reception command is stored in the empty area in the first starting winning reception command buffer 90194A, When the reception command is the second starting opening winning notification command or when the starting opening winning notification command immediately before the receiving command is the second starting opening winning notification command (receive the second starting opening winning notification command If the first start-up winning award notification command has not been received after the Stored in the free space in 90194B. Following the process of step S90512, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is a fluctuation pattern specification command. (Step S90513). When it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; YES), the CPU for effect control 90201 stores the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90515). . Following the process of step S90515, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90513 that the received command is not a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 performs setting or the like according to other respective received commands (step S90518). For example, when the reception command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 may analyze the gaming state designation command to specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S90518, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S9076). In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 67, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a prize effect determination process (step S90150). In the prize effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the contents stored in the start prize winning reception command buffer (the first start prize winning reception command buffer 90194A or the second start prize reception command buffer 90194B), or reception As a command, a process of determining whether or not a start-up opening prize notification command is received, a process of determining an effect such as holding, and the like are executed.

  Following the effect determination process for winning (step S90150), the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative design in the device 905. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started (that is, when the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S 90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 905 corresponding to variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B (for example, , And processing for performing the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time) and setting of the value of the fluctuation time timer, and for performing display operations such as the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. A process of setting (for example, setting of a rendering control pattern corresponding to the display operation) is included. In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S90172 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". During the variable display effect processing, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting processing (step S90171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 special figure fluctuation time Processing to determine whether or not In the variable display effect process, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The process for waiting for a special drawing in step S90173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." Special processing per wait processing is the processing to be executed when the finalized decoration symbol is "missing" When the variation gaming state setting process to set the gaming state of the pachinko machine 901, or when the finalized ornament symbol is "big hit" The processing to be performed includes processing for performing setting for performing fanfare production (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to the fanfare production, etc.). In the waiting process per special drawing, when the finalized decoration symbol is "loss", the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the finalized ornament pattern is "big hit", Update the value to "4".

  The big hit start process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, or a process being executed when the large winning opening open notification command is received, an effect being released (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect being released, etc.) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the open state. In the big hit start process, when the big winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The process in round of step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". Processing during the round is processing to determine whether or not the notification command after the big winning a prize opening has been received, and the processing being executed when the notification command after the big winning a prize opening is received is closed effect (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect being closed) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the closed state. In the process during the round, when the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round process in step S90176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The round post-processing performs processing during open processing as processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening open notification command or hit termination designation command has been received, or processing to be executed when the special winning opening opening notification command is received. Processing for performing setting (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or setting for performing ending effect as processing to be executed when a hit end designation command is received (for example, for ending effect) It includes the process of setting the value of the corresponding effect control pattern, the value of the ending effect execution time timer, and the like. In the round post process, when the special winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", and when the hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" Do.

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S90177 is processing executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end post-processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S90176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the start of the execution of the ending effect in the image display device 905 has reached the set time) And the like are included. In the big hit end post processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning. In the prize effect determination process shown in FIG. 68, the effect control CPU 90120 first stores the storage content in the start prize receive command buffer (the first start prize receive command buffer 90194A or the second start prize receive command buffer 90194B) Is checked (step S90151), and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received as a new reception command (step S90152). If it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90152; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 checks the storage content in the second starting winning reception command buffer 90194B ( Step S90153) It is judged whether or not the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received as a new reception command (step S90153). If it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90154; NO), the effect determination process at the time of winning is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S90152; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state (high probability high base state) (step S90152). When it is determined that the time saving state is not set (step S90155; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect determination processing such as hold (step S90160A). A process for determining the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning storage display area 905HL (specifically, for the holding etc. effect in the first start winning storage display area 905HL, in the hold etc. effect determination processing in step S90160A A process of determining the presence or absence of execution, and a process of determining an effect pattern such as hold when it is determined to be executed is included. Details will be described later.

  After executing the hold etc. effect determination processing (step S90160A), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined contents of the hold etc. effect determination processing (step S90160 B). Specifically, for example, when the CPU 90120 for effect control determines to execute the effect such as holding in the effect determining process such as holding in step S90160A, the effect pattern such as the holding determined in the effect determining process such as holding in step S90160A The information indicating the display mode (that is, the display mode at the time of addition and after shift specified by the hold etc. effect pattern) corresponds to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning receive command buffer 90194A. It stores it in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 90194C. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines not to execute effects such as hold and the like in the effect determination process such as hold and the like in step S90160A, a normal display mode (for example, white) is displayed as a display mode upon addition and after each shift. ) Is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 90194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning received command command buffer 90194A.

  After executing the process of step S90160B, the CPU for producing control 90120 executes the chance zone effect determining process (step S90161A), and stores the determined content of the chance zone effect (step S90161B). Details of the chance zone effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the processing of step S90161B, the effect control CPU 90120 adds the first hold display to the first start winning storage display area 905HL in the top layer (Z value = 0) (step S90162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the first hold display based on the determination content stored in step S90160 B (the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first preread notice buffer 90194C described above) Is set as a usage pattern to display the first hold display by the first start winning storage display area 905HL as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data is included in the set presentation control pattern and display control In the highest layer (Z value = 0) by transmitting the Z value (Z value = 0) as designation of the display layer while transmitting to the VDP etc. of the part 90123, etc. in the top layer (Z value = 0), Display a display image such as hold etc. corresponding to the display mode of the hold display at the time of addition determined To display by pressing). Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received (step S90154; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability high base state) (step S90156). When it is determined that the time saving state (high probability high base state) is (step S90156; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect determining process such as hold (step S90163A). The hold etc. effect determination processing in step S90163A is the same as the hold etc. effect determination processing in step S90160A. That is, the processing for determining the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR (specifically, the hold in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, etc. in the hold etc. effect determination processing in step S90163A) A process of determining the presence or absence of an effect, and a process of determining an effect pattern such as hold when it is determined to execute is included.

  After executing the on-hold etc. effect determining process (step S90163A), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processes of step S90163 B, step S90164 A, step S90164 B, and step S90165, and ends the winning time effect determining process. The processing of steps S90163B, S90164A, S90164B, and S90165 pertaining to the second starting opening winning is the same as the respective processing of steps S90160B, S90161A, S90161B, and S90162 pertaining to the first starting opening winning. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S90155 that it is in the time saving state (step S90155; YES) or if it is determined in step S90156 that it is not in the time saving state (step S90156; NO), the hold addition process according to the starting opening winning combination is executed. (S90166). Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S90152; YES, step S90155; YES), the CPU 90120 for effect control executes effects such as holding in the effect determining process such as holding in step S90160A. Similarly to the case where it is determined not to be stored, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode upon addition and after each shift, and the first hold display displayed in the normal display mode is started at the first start It adds to prize memory display area 905HL. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished. On the other hand, when the second starting opening winning a prize specified command has been received (step S90154; YES, step S90156; NO), CPU90120 for production control decides that it does not execute production such as hold in production decision processing such as hold of step S90163A. In the same manner as in the above case, information indicating the normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as the display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the second hold display displayed in the normal display mode is the second start winning memory display Add to area 905HR. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the process of determining an effect such as holding (steps S90160A, S90163A). FIG. 69 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a hold etc. effect determination process. In the hold determination etc. effect determination process shown in FIG. 69 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 first makes a plurality of hold hold etc. effect execution presence / absence decision tables stored in the ROM 90121 (hold etc. according to the type of variation category) From the execution presence / absence decision table), a holding etc. effect execution presence / absence decision table according to the variation category indicated by the variation category command is selected and set (step S9000).

  FIG. 69 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining a determination ratio of presence / absence of effect such as holding. According to the example shown in FIG. 69 (B), execution non-execution presence of staging etc. is determined based on the change category indicated by the change category command. That is, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA1 ′” or “PA2 ′” or “PA3 ′”, non-execution is determined at a rate of 90% and execution is determined at a rate of 10%. Ru. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PA4 '" or "PA5'", no execution is determined at a rate of 70% and execution is determined at a rate of 30%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PB1 '" or "PB3'", non-execution is determined at a rate of 60% and execution is determined at a rate of 40%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PB 4 '" or "PB 5'", non-execution is determined at a rate of 20% and execution is determined at a rate of 80%.

  In each of the pending etc. effects execution presence / absence decision tables, “execution non” and “execution present” are made so that “execution nothing” and “execution present” are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 69 (B). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determination of presence / absence of effect execution is set to each of them. For example, in the hold etc. effect execution presence / absence decision table referred to when “PA1 ′” or “PA2 ′” or “PA3 ′”, “non-execution” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “execution present” is As determined at a rate of 10%, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether to perform rendering etc. are assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution present”. In the hold etc. presentation effect execution presence / absence decision table to be referred to when it is "PA4 '" or "PA5'", "execution nothing" is determined at a rate of 70%, and "execution yes" is determined at a rate of 30% As in the above, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether to perform rendering etc. are assigned to “no execution” and “execution present”, respectively. In the hold etc. presentation effect execution presence / absence decision table to be referred to when it is “PB1 ′” or “PB3 ′”, “execution non” is determined at a rate of 60%, and “execution yes” is determined at a rate of 40% As in the above, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether to perform rendering etc. are assigned to “no execution” and “execution present”, respectively. In the holding effect etc. execution presence / absence decision table to be referred to when it is "PB 4 '" or "PB 5'", "execution non" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "execution is" at a rate of 80% As in the above, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining whether to perform rendering etc. are assigned to “no execution” and “execution present”, respectively. In addition, the random value for determination of presence or absence of presentation execution presence / absence determination may be updated, for example, in the random number updating process for presentation (step S9077).

  Subsequent to the process of step S9000, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence or absence of the effect such as holding on the basis of the random value for determining the presence or absence of the effect execution such as holding (step S9001). That is, CPU 90120 for production control, numerical value data which shows the random number value for the production execution presence / absence decision decision with retention etc, and the decision value of “execution non existence” or “execution presence” in the suspension etc production effect presence / absence decision table set in step S9000. To determine the presence or absence of the execution of the effect such as holding.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 9001, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute an effect such as hold (step S 9002). If it is decided to execute the effect such as hold (step S9002; YES), the CPU 90120 for effect control stores the number of held memories (prize is held from among the plural types of hold etc. effect pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 90121) A hold etc. effect pattern determination table corresponding to the number of items is selected and set according to the change category command (step S9003). That is, when the winning a prize is the first hold (the first hold in the first start winning storage display area 905HL or the first hold in the second start winning storage display area 905HR), the effect control CPU 90120 The hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold is set, and the winning is held for the second hold (the second hold for the first start winning memory display area 905HL, or the second hold for the second start prize memory display area 905HR) If it is the first one, the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the second hold is set, and the winning is the third hold (the third hold in the first start winning display area 905 HL, or the second start) If it is the 3rd hold in the prize storage display area 905HR), the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the 3rd hold is set, and the prize is held 4 If it is an eye (the first hold of the first start winning storage display area 905HL, or the fourth holding of the second start winning storage display area 905HR), the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the fourth hold set.

  Subsequent to the process of step S9003, the effect control CPU 90120 determines an effect pattern such as a hold based on a random value for determining an effect pattern such as a hold (step S9004). That is, CPU 90120 for production control compares the numerical value data which shows the random number value for reservation etc. production pattern determination, and the decision value of each reservation etc. production pattern in the reservation etc. presentation pattern determination table set in step S9003 etc. The first hold etc. production pattern is decided. Then, the processing such as holding etc. is ended. In addition, the random number value for determination of a presentation pattern etc. may be updated, for example, in the random number updating process for presentation (step S9077).

  On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the effect such as hold (step S9002; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control displays white as the display mode upon addition of the hold display and after each shift and the active display A normal display mode is determined (step S9005). Then, the processing such as holding etc. is ended.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory view for explaining an effect pattern or the like on hold. FIG. 70A shows an example of an effect pattern (for example, on hold) determined by the on-hold effect pattern determination table for the third hold. That is, when it is determined that the effect such as on hold is to be performed in the on hold etc. effect determination processing to be executed when the winning is the third on hold (step S9002; YES), a plurality of the hold shown in FIG. The one pending etc. producing pattern is determined from among the etc. producing patterns (for example, holding etc. producing patterns “HP1” to “HP14”).

  In FIG. 70 (A), the "display mode of the hold display at the position of the third hold" in the figure is a display mode of the hold display at the position before the first shift after the additional display. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at a position three stops before the first start winning memory display area 905HL, or the second hold at a position three stops before the second start winning memory display area 905HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position” in the drawing is a display mode of the hold display at the position after the first shift and before the second shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at a position two stops before the first start winning memory display area 905HL, or the second hold at a position two stops before the second start winning memory display area 905HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” in the drawing is the display mode of the hold display at the position after the second shift and before the third shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position one digest before the first start winning memory display area 905HL, or the second hold at the position one digest before the second start prize memory display area 905HR. It is a display mode of display.

  In (A) of FIG. 70, for example, the holding etc. effect pattern “HP1” displays white as a holding display for the third holding position, displays white as a holding display for the second holding position, and holds 1 This is an effect pattern such as a hold that displays white as a hold display of the second position and displays yellow as an active display. The display pattern "HP2" for holding etc. displays white as a holding display for the third holding position, displays white as a holding display for the second holding position, and yellow as a holding display for the first holding position. It is an effect pattern such as holding and displaying yellow and displaying yellow as active display. The reserve etc. effect pattern "HP3" displays white as a reserve display of the third reserve position, yellow as a reserve display of the second reserve position, and yellow as a reserve display of the first reserve position. It is an effect pattern such as holding and displaying yellow and displaying yellow as active display. The holding pattern etc. “HP 4” to “HP 14” are also as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 (A) shows the hold etc. effect pattern determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third held, but the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold Hold etc. effect pattern determined, hold etc. effect pattern determined by hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the second hold, hold etc. effect determined by the fourth hold The same applies to patterns.

  For example, the presentation pattern for suspension etc. determined by the presentation pattern determination table for suspension 1st etc. is “display mode of the suspension display at the first position of suspension” and “display mode of suspension display for active display” Should be set. The presentation patterns for holding etc. determined by the holding etc. effect pattern determination table for the second held product are “display mode of the held display at the second held position” and “display mode of the held display at the first held position” And “display mode of the display on hold of the active display” may be set. The hold etc. effect pattern determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the fourth hold is “display mode of the hold display at the fourth hold position” and “display mode of the hold display at the third hold position” If “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position”, “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” and “display mode of the hold display of the active display” are set. Just do it.

  FIG. 70 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the hold etc. effect pattern by the hold etc. hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. According to the example shown in FIG. 70 (B), the determination ratio of the effect pattern such as holding is different according to the variation category indicated by the variation category command. In the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold, one hold etc. effect pattern from among the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” corresponds to FIG. 70 (B Each of the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” is compared with a random number value (not shown) for hold etc. effect pattern determination according to the variation category command, as determined by the ratio as shown in). It is sufficient if assigned numerical values (decision values).

  For example, in the hold etc. effect pattern determination table to be referred to when it is “PA4 ′” or “PA5 ′”, each of the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a rate of 23%, etc. Each of the presentation patterns “HP5” to “HP12” is determined at a ratio of 1%, the value to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determination of presentation patterns such as holding etc. Value) should be assigned. In addition, in the pending etc. effect pattern determination table to be referred to when it is “PB1 ′” or “PA3 ′”, each of the pending etc. produced effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a ratio of 20%, etc. Each of the presentation patterns “HP5” to “HP14” is determined at a ratio of 2%, the respective presentation patterns for suspension etc. are compared with random numbers (not shown) for determination of presentation patterns for suspension etc. (judgment Value) should be assigned.

  In addition, the determination ratio of the presentation pattern such as suspension by the presentation pattern determination table for the first suspension etc., the determination ratio of presentation pattern such as the suspension etc. by the presentation pattern determination table for the second suspension etc, the fourth Although the rate of determining the pending etc. presentation pattern by the pending etc. presentation pattern determination table is omitted, it is three pending when the first pending and the second pending and the fourth pending As in the case of the eyes, any presentation pattern such as hold may be determined.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance zone effect determination process (steps S90161A and S90164A). FIG. 71 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect determination process. In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 71 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the winning is the third or fourth (step S9010). When it is determined that the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), that is, when the winning is the first or second, the chance zone effect determining process is ended.

  If it is determined that the third or fourth prize is won (step S9010; YES), the CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not it is a chance zone effect period (period in which chance zone effect is being executed). (Step S9011). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is already set as the use pattern, or the set content when the use pattern is already set (execution timing, etc. Whether or not it is a chance zone presentation period may be determined based on the value of the presentation control process timer) and. If it is determined that it is a chance zone effect period (step S9011; YES), the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  If it is determined that it is not a chance zone effect period (step S9011; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 has already been determined to be a chance zone effect execution state (a state where it has been decided to execute a chance zone effect but has not executed It is determined whether or not (step S9012). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 associates information with any buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 90194C (or the second read advance notice buffer 90194D) and indicates information (described later) indicating that it is a target of chance zone effect Whether or not the chance zone rendering execution decision has been made may be determined based on whether or not it has already been stored. If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has been determined (step S9012: YES), the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has not been determined (step S9012; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control stores a plurality of chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision tables (chance zones according to the types of fluctuation categories) stored in the ROM 90121 From the effect execution presence / absence decision table), a chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table according to the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command is selected and set (step S9013).

  FIG. 71 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the execution of the chance zone effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 71 (B), execution non-execution presence of chance zone presentation is determined based on the variation category indicated by the variation category command. That is, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PA1 '" or "PA2'" or "PA3 '", no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PA4 '" or "PA5'", non-execution is determined at a rate of 95% and execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PB1 '" or "PB3'", no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "PB 4 '" or "PB 5'", non-execution is determined at a rate of 80% and execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  In each chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, “execution nothing” and “execution yes” are determined so that “execution nothing” and “execution yes” are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 71 (B). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining presence / absence of execution of chance zone effect is assigned to each of them. For example, in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table to which reference is made when “PA1 ′” or “PA2 ′” or “PA3 ′”, “execution nothing” is determined at a rate of 100% A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining presence / absence of execution of chance zone effect is assigned to each of “none” and “execution yes”. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table to be referred to when "PA4 '" or "PA5'", "no execution" is determined at a rate of 95% and "execution yes" is determined at a rate of 5% As in the above, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining presence / absence of execution of chance zones are assigned to “no execution” and “execution yes”, respectively. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table to which reference is made when it is "PB1 '" or "PB3'", "execution non" and "execution yes" so that "no execution" is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining presence / absence of execution of chance zone presentation is assigned to each of the above. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table referenced when “PB 4 ′” or “PB 5 ′”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 80% and “execution yes” is determined at a rate of 20% As in the above, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for determining presence / absence of execution of chance zones are assigned to “no execution” and “execution yes”, respectively. Note that the random number value for chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination may be updated, for example, in the effect random number updating process (step S9077).

  Following the process of step S9013, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence or absence of chance zone effect execution based on the random number value for determining the chance zone effect execution presence or absence (step S9014). That is, CPU 90120 for production control, numerical value data which shows the random number value for the chance zone production execution existence decision, with the decision value of execution non existence or the execution presence in the chance zone production execution existence decision table which is set in step S9013 To determine the presence or absence of execution of the chance zone effect. Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 decides to execute the chance zone effect, the buffer for the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A (or the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B) for storing hold information for the current winning is stored. Information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 90194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 90194D) corresponding to the number. Then, the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 71, when the third or fourth win is not made (step S9010; NO), chance zone effect is not executed, but the third or fourth win is achieved. Even when it is not the eyes, chance zone rendition may be performed. For example, when it is the first winning, the chance zone effect may be started from the change of the target which is the next change. In addition, when there is no prize during the change of the target, the chance zone effect may be ended when the change of the target is over. In addition, when there is a prize during the fluctuation of the target, the chance to finish the fluctuation corresponding to the prize unconditionally (or limited to the case where the big hit expectation of the fluctuation corresponding to the prize is high) Zone presentation may be continued, or chance zone presentation may be ended at the end of target variation, as in the case where there is no prize in the variation of the target.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (step S90171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 72, first, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or not, and so on. It is determined (step S90522). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is a first variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “lost” in the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process of step S90170. If there is, it is determined that it is a "loss". On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is the second variable display result notification command notifying that the variable display result is the 16R probability variation big hit. If the result is a third variable display result notification command that notifies that the result is an 8R probability variation big hit, it is determined that it is not a "loss".

  If it is determined in step S90522 that "losing" is present (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 is, for example, a fluctuation designated by reading EXT data in a fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or the like. Non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the pattern changes the display mode of the decorative symbol to "non-reach" (that is, "PA1'-1", "PA2'-1", "PA2'-2" in FIG. 46) It is determined whether or not (step S90523).

  If it is determined in step S90523 that the pattern is the non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S90523; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that constitutes the non-reach combination (step S90524 ). As an example, in the process of step S90524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905 L in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like With reference to the finalized decorative symbol, the right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decoration symbol is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In the process of step S90524, the determined decorative symbol of the non-reach combination to be the predetermined chance symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol advance is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S90523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S90523; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that constitutes the reach combination (step S90525) . As an example, in the process of step S90525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 90193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the left and right decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decorative symbol are aligned and stopped and displayed. The symbol number determines the same decorative symbol. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decoration symbol and the right fixed decoration symbol, if the fixed decoration symbol becomes a big hit combination, an arbitrary value ( For example, by adding or subtracting “1”) to or from the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  If it is determined in step S90522 that "losing" is not made (step S90522; NO), that is, if "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)", the effect control CPU 90120 configures the big hit combination A combination of symbols (final stop symbols) is determined (step S90528). As an example, in the process of step S90528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193 or the like is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., it is displayed in a stop on the screen of the image display device 5 in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. Decide on a decorative pattern with the same symbol number.

  In addition, when determining the combination of the finalized decoration symbol in step S90528, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the final ornament according to the type of the big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit), presence or absence of promotion effect, etc. The symbol may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a big hit combination for exclusive use of 16R positive variation big hit (for example, one in which three identical decorative designs are arranged side by side) and a big hit combination exclusively for 8R positive variation big hit (for example, the same same ornament design even number In the embodiment in which 3 pieces are arranged side by side, in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, it is sufficient to decide either the 16R probability variation big hit dedicated combination or the 8R probability variation big hit combination specifically as the determined decoration pattern . At this time, when a big hit combination dedicated to 8R certainty big hit is determined as a finalized decorative symbol, it is sufficient to be notified that it is a 16R true variable big hit between the end of eight rounds as a promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, it may be decided to determine the 8R probability variation big hit dedicated combination or a big hit combination as the decoration symbol.

  In this embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, a combination of finalized design symbols (final stop design) corresponding to 2R probability variation big hit (probability) You may decide.

  After executing any of the processes of step S90524, step S90525, and step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the change is a change of the chance zone (step S90529A) . For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has already stored information indicating that it is the target of chance zone effect in association with any buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 90194C (or the second read advance notice buffer 90194D). It may be determined whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on whether or not it is present.

  If it is determined in step S90529A that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S90529A; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect as a use pattern (step S90529B) . That is, when information indicating that it is a target is determined to be executed in the chance zone effect determination process (FIG. 71) executed at the time of winning and it is determined that it is a target (step S9014) In the variable display start setting process, an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern. As a result, when the chance zone effect is performed at the time of winning, the chance zone effect is started from the next change (the change which is first started after the winning).

  If it is determined in step S90529A that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S90529A; NO), or after the process of step S90529B is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the process in the top layer (Z value = 0). , And hold processing (shift processing) is executed (step S90531). More specifically, when the effect control CPU 90120 starts the variation of the decorative symbol in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the present decorative symbol is in conjunction with the first special figure game) ) And hold display after shift or active display based on the hold etc. effect pattern (that is, the content stored in step S90160 B) determined in the hold etc. effect determination process (step S90160 A) of the prize effect determination process (step S90150) The effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode is set as the usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 and the display By transmitting the Z value (Z value = 0) as the layer specification, the top Ja in (Z value = 0), (to be displayed by shifting the display position) hold display and displays the hold or the like displaying an image corresponding to the display mode of the active display after the shift determined in pending such effect determination process. In addition, it is also the same about when changing the decorative symbol in conjunction with the second special figure game (when the variable display of the current decorative symbol is interlocked with the second special figure game).

  After executing the reserve processing of step S90531, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the variation or the like as a usage pattern (step S90532). That is, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 as a usage pattern.

  After executing the process of step S90532, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S90532 (step S90534), and starts the effect control process timer. Then (step S90535), the rendering device such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S90536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, in the fluctuation time timer, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 46) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90537).

  After executing the processing of step S90537, the effect control CPU 90120 digests the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B (step S90538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is the smallest of the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special view game. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") is deleted, and in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted Each command stored in the corresponding area is shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the second special view game, effect control CPU 90120 has the smallest buffer number among the commands stored in second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B ( The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B The respective commands stored in are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S90538, the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 90194C or the second read notice buffer 90194D provided in the RAM 90122 or the like according to the deletion or shift of the command. Deletions and shifts are also performed. Further, in the process of step S90538, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stores a command to be deleted (a symbol designation command of the variation, a variation category command, etc.) in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122.

  Following the process of step S 90538, CPU 90120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to effect process during variable display (step S90539), and ends the variable display start setting process. .

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of variable-display effect processing (step S90172). In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 90120 first subtracts 1 from the change time timer value (step S90540), and determines whether the change time timer value has become 0 (step S90541) ). That is, it is determined whether the fluctuation time timer has timed out. When the fluctuation time timer value becomes 0 (step S90541; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for the special figure (step S90548) ), The variable display effect processing ends.

  When the fluctuation time timer value is not 0 (step S90541; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the middle line of FIG. 76A to be effective in the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top. Operation control (variable display) of the decorative pattern on a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e) and invalid line (out-of-frame upper line f, out-of-frame lower line g) Execute (start, continue) (S90542). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 includes a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 72). By transmitting to the VDP etc. of the display control unit 90123 and by transmitting information such as Z value (Z value = 2) as designation of display layer and designation of valid line and invalid line as designation of display line, etc. In the third layer from the top (Z value = 2), the decorative pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is variably displayed on the effective line and the invalid line.

  After executing the processing of step S90542, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the change is a change of the chance zone (step S90543). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has already stored information indicating that it is the target of chance zone effect in association with any buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 90194C (or the second read advance notice buffer 90194D). It may be determined whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on whether or not it is present. If it is determined that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S 90543; NO), the variable display effect processing ends.

  If it is determined that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S 90543; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 controls the operation of the chance zone effect in the second highest layer (Z value = 1) (operation Display (operation control to display the chance zone effect image in the operation mode) is executed (started and continued) (step S90544). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is a display control command designated by the display control data, included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 72). Is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 and the like, and by transmitting the Z value (Z value = 1) as the designation of the display layer, etc., the opportunity in the second highest layer (Z value = 1) from the top The chance zone effect image corresponding to the zone effect is displayed. Then, the variable display effect processing ends.

  When it is determined that chance zone effect is to be performed in the determination (step S9014) of the presence or absence of the chance zone effect execution in the chance zone effect determination process (see FIG. 71A), the number of pending storages Set the chance zone continuation counter according to whether or not (for example, the count value “1” for the first hold, for example, the count value “2” for the second hold, for example For example, the count value "3" may be set when the unit is the fourth, and the count value "4" may be set, for example, when the unit is the fourth hold, and the chance zone continuation counter may be decremented by one for each shift. The chance zone continuation counter may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193.

  As described above, when using the chance zone continuation counter, in the process of step S9020, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the change is a change of the chance zone based on the value of the chance zone continuation counter. You may

  FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are flowcharts showing an example of the special figure hit waiting process (step S90173). In special processing per special drawing shown in FIG. 74, the CPU for effect control 90120 first determines whether the flag after symbol stop is on or not (step S90720). The symbol stop flag is provided, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 and the like. After the symbol stop, the flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S90723 in response to the symbol determination designation command being received.

  When the flag after symbol stop is off at step S90720 (step S90720; NO), CPU 90120 for effect control determines whether or not the symbol determination designating command is received (step S90721). When it is determined that the symbol determination designating command has not been received (step S90721; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 is the third layer from the top (similar to step S90542 in the variable display effect process (see FIG. 73)) In Z value = 2), the operation control (variable display) of the decorative pattern is executed (started and continued) on the effective line and the invalid line (S90722). Then, the process proceeds to step S90730 in FIG.

  If it is determined that the symbol determination designation command has been received (step S90721: YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the flag after symbol stop to the on state (step S90723). Subsequent to the process of step S90723, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the current gaming state is the high base state (step S90724). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine whether or not the high base state is set with reference to the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191.

  If it is determined in step S90724 that the high base state is not set (step S90724; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the third layer from top (Z value = 2) to be on the valid line and the invalid line. And execute (start, continue) operation control (stop display) of the decorative symbol (step S90725). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 produces an effect corresponding to the final stop symbol (final stop symbol determined in step S90524 or step S90525 or step S90528) determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 72). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 and the like, and the Z value (Z value = 2) as the specification of the display layer and the specification of the display line In the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top, the decorative symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol is stopped on the valid line and on the invalid line by transmitting information specifying the valid line and invalid line. Display. Then, the process proceeds to step S90730 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S90724 that the base is in the high base state (step S90724; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 operates the decorative symbol on the effective line in the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top The control (display of stop) is executed (started, continued) (step S90726). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 produces an effect corresponding to the final stop symbol (final stop symbol determined in step S90524 or step S90525 or step S90528) determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 72). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 and the like, and the Z value (Z value = 2) as the specification of the display layer and the specification of the display line In the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top, the decorative symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line by transmitting information specifying the effective line. Then, the process proceeds to step S90730 in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S90720 that the flag after symbol stop is on (step S90720; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the current gaming state is the high base state (step S90727). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine whether or not the high base state is set with reference to the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191.

  If it is determined in step S90727 that the high base state is not set (step S90727; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether two seconds have elapsed since the stop display (step S90728). For example, in the process of stopping and displaying the decorative symbol (in the process of step S90725), a timer is set after the stop display with an initial value of 2 seconds, and in the process of step S90728, whether or not the timer after stop display has timed out It is sufficient to determine In addition, when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stop before receiving the symbol determination specification command, it may be determined whether or not 2 seconds have elapsed from the stop display, or 2 seconds from the reception of the symbol determination specification command. It may be determined whether or not has elapsed.

  If two seconds have not elapsed from the stop display in step S 90728 (step S 90728; NO), the process proceeds to step S 90724. If two seconds have elapsed from the stop display in step S 90728 (step S 90728; YES), the process proceeds to step S 90734 in FIG. 75 (B).

  If it is determined in step S90727 that the high base state is set (step S90727; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the stop display (step S90729). For example, in the process of stopping and displaying the decorative symbol (in the process of step S90726), the timer is set after the stop display whose initial value is 0.5 seconds, and in the process of step S90729, does the timer after the stop display time out? It may be determined whether or not. In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before receiving the symbol confirmation designating command, it may be determined whether or not 0.5 seconds has elapsed from the stop display, or from the reception of the symbol confirmation designating command. It may be determined whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed.

  If 0.5 seconds have not elapsed from the stop display in step S90729 (step S90729; NO), the process proceeds to step S90724. If 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the stop display in step S90729 (step S90729; YES), the process proceeds to step S90734 in FIG. 75 (B).

  Subsequent to the process of step S90722, or the process of step S90725, or the process of step S90726, the CPU for effect control 90120 changes the variation of the chance zone as in step S90543 of the effect process during variable display (see FIG. 73). It is determined whether or not there is a change (step S90730 in FIG. 75A). If it is determined that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S90730; NO), the special-character-per-wait process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90730 that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S90730; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the after-pattern stop flag is on (step S90731).

  When the flag after symbol stop is off at step S90731 (step S90731; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control is the second layer from the top (Z as in step S90544 of effect processing during variable display (see FIG. 73). In the value = 1), operation control of the chance zone effect (operation display. Operation control for displaying the chance zone effect image in the operation mode) is executed (started and continued) (step S90732). Then, the processing for waiting for a special figure ends.

  When the flag after symbol stop is on at step S90731 (step S90731; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 controls the operation of chance zone effect (static display) in the second highest layer (Z value = 1). Operation control to display the chance zone effect image in a still mode is executed (started and continued) (step S90733). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is a display control command designated by the display control data, included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 72). Is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 and the like, and by transmitting the Z value (Z value = 1) as the designation of the display layer, etc., the opportunity in the second highest layer (Z value = 1) from the top The chance zone effect image corresponding to the zone effect is stopped and displayed. Then, the processing for waiting for a special figure ends.

  When 2 seconds have passed since the stop display in step S 90728 (step S 90728; YES), or when 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display in step S 90729 (step S 907 29; YES), the CPU 90120 for effect control is confirmed It is determined whether the decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S 90734). If the finalized decorative symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S 90734; NO), the CPU for effect control 90120 clears the flag after symbol stopping and turns it off (step S 90735), and changes the value of the effect process flag to a variable display start waiting process The corresponding value is updated to “0” (step S 90736), and the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  If the finalized decoration symbol is a big hit symbol (step S 90734; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received (step S 90737). If it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S 90734; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

  When it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received (step S 90734; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag after symbol stop and sets it in the off state (step S 90738), and sets the fanfare effect (step S 9038) In step S90739), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit start process (step S90740), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

  Incidentally, according to the special-character-per-call waiting process shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the time when the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the low base state is 2 seconds (step S 90728), and the decoration is in the high base state. The time for which the symbol is displayed for a final stop is 0.5 seconds (step S90729), but each time is an example. The time to display the decorative symbol at the final stop in the high base state and the time to display the final symbol at the final stop in the low base state may be the same as in the low base state, but the decorative symbol is in the high base state The time for the final stop display may be shorter than the time for the decorative symbol to display the final stop when in the low base state.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 905. (A) of FIG. 76 (A) is an example of the stop display of the decorative symbol in the low base state. In (a) of FIG. 76 (A), decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) during stop display are indicated by solid lines. In the example shown in (a) of FIG. 76 (A), the left symbol “8” and the middle symbol “7” are stopped and displayed on the middle row line a, and the right symbol “8” is displayed on the upper row line b. The stop display is displayed, the right symbol “7” is displayed stopped on the lower line c, and the middle symbol “7” and the right symbol “8” are displayed stopped on the upper right line d, and the right lower line e Above, the middle symbol "7" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the example shown in (a) of FIG. 76 (A), the left symbol "7" and the middle symbol "8" are stopped and displayed on the frame outer upper line f, and the left symbol is displayed on the frame outer lower line g. The symbol "1" and the middle symbol "6" are stopped and displayed. In addition, for example, the figure between the right symbol "8" and the right symbol "7" is a blank symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a symbol "blank") which does not constitute a big hit combination.

  According to (a) of FIG. 76 (A), in the low base state, the decorative design is added on the effective line (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e). Therefore, the stop display is also performed on the invalid line (outside upper line f, lower outside line g).

  That is, as shown in (a) of FIG. 76A, the effect control CPU 90120 is in the stop display processing of the decorative symbol in the low base state (processing of step S90725 of the waiting processing per special drawing in FIG. 74). , Stop the decorative design on the effective line and on the invalid line.

  (A) of FIG. 76 (B) is an example of the stop display of the decorative symbol in the high base state. In (a) of FIG. 76 (B), decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) during stop display are shown by solid lines. In the example shown in (a) of FIG. 76 (B), ((A) of FIG. 76) is displayed on the middle line a, the upper line b, the lower line c, the right downward line e, and the right downward line e. As in a), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the example shown in (a) of FIG. 76 (B), unlike in (a) of FIG. 76 (A), the left figure, the middle figure and the right figure are on the frame outer upper line f and the frame outer lower line g. Does not show stop.

  According to (a) of FIG. 76 (B), in the high base state, the decorative design on the effective line (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e). Although the stop display is shown, the stop display is not performed on the invalid line (outside upper line f, lower outer line g).

  That is, the effect control CPU 90120 is shown in (a) of FIG. 76 (B) in the stop display process of the decorative symbol in the high base state (process of step S90726 of the waiting process per special drawing of FIG. 74). The stop display of the decorative pattern on the effective line is not displayed (the stop display of the decorative pattern is not performed on the invalid line).

  (B) of FIG. 76 (A) is a figure explaining the variable display of a decorative pattern. Specifically, (b) of FIG. 76 (A) shows that a decorative symbol (specifically, left symbol "3") is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905L. In (b) of FIG. 76 (A), the decorative symbol (left symbol "3") in the variable display is indicated by a broken line. Moreover, in (b) of FIG. 76 (A), the figure on the left, the figure on the center, and the figure on the right are arranged in time series in which the decorative symbol (left symbol “3”) is variably displayed (( Temporal transition in the order of the figure on the left → the figure in the center → the figure on the right). The same applies to (b) of FIG. 76 (B). In addition, the decorative symbol in the variable display shown by the broken line is visible. That is, the decorative symbol variably displayed in a visible manner is indicated by a broken line.

  In the following description, that the left symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a means that the central portion of the left symbol (for example, the central portion in the vertical direction) is variably displayed on the middle line a at a certain timing. It means that. That the left symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b means that the central portion of the left symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b at a certain timing. That the left symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c means that the central portion of the left symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c at a certain timing. That the left symbol is variably displayed on the upward line d means that the central portion of the left symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c at a certain timing. That the left symbol is variably displayed on the lower right line e means that the central portion of the left symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b at a certain timing. Variable display of the left symbol on the frame upper line f means that the central portion of the left symbol is variably displayed on the outer frame upper line f at a certain timing. That the left symbol is variably displayed on the frame lower line g means that the central portion of the left symbol is variably displayed on the frame lower line g at a certain timing.

  Further, in the following description, that the middle symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a at a certain timing. That the middle symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b at a certain timing. That the middle symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c at a certain timing. Variable display of the middle symbol on the upward line d means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a at a certain timing. That the middle symbol is variably displayed on the lower right line e means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a at a certain timing. That the middle symbol is variably displayed on the frame outer upper line f means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the outer frame upper line f at a certain timing. That the middle symbol is variably displayed on the frame outer lower line g means that the central portion of the middle symbol is variably displayed on the outer frame lower line g at a certain timing.

  Further, in the following description, that the right symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a means that the central portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the middle line a at a certain timing. That the right symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b means that the central portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b at a certain timing. That the right symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c means that the central portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c at a certain timing. That the right symbol is variably displayed on the upward line d means that the central portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the upper line b at a certain timing. That the right symbol is variably displayed on the right downward line e means that the central portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the lower line c at a certain timing. That the right symbol is variably displayed on the frame upper line f means that the central portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the frame upper line f at a certain timing. That the right symbol is variably displayed on the frame bottom lower line g means that the center portion of the right symbol is variably displayed on the frame bottom lower line g at a certain timing.

  The figure on the left side of (b) of FIG. 76 (A) has shown the position where the left symbol "3" which carries out variable display appears. The figure on the right side shows the position where the left symbol “3” to be variably displayed disappears. The middle figure shows a scene in which the left symbol “3” to be variably displayed passes on the middle line a. That is, the left symbol “3” is variably displayed in the entire area (between the top and the bottom) of the decorative symbol display area 5L.

  According to (b) of FIG. 76 (A), the central part (central part in the vertical direction) of the left symbol "3" is at a certain timing (a timing between the timing on the left side and the timing on the center side) It is variably displayed on the outer line upper line f and the upper line b. Further, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (A), the central portion of the left symbol “3” is variably displayed on the middle line a at a certain timing (the timing of the central diagram). Also, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (A), the central part of the left symbol “3” is on the lower line c at a certain timing (a timing between the timing of the central drawing and the timing of the right drawing) It is variably displayed on the out-of-frame lower line g. That is, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (A), the left symbol "3" is added on the effective line (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e). Therefore, the variable display is also performed on the invalid line (outside upper line f, lower outside line g).

  Also, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 76 (A) (b) shows that the left symbol "3" is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905L, but other than the left symbol "3" in the decorative symbol display area 905L The same applies to the case where the left symbol of is variably displayed. The same applies to the case where the middle symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905C or the right symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905R. That is, the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are variably displayed on the ineffective line in addition to the effective line. The same applies to (b) of FIG. 76 (B).

  That is, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the variable display process of the decorative symbol (the process of step S90542 of the effect process during the variable display of FIG. 73, the process of step S90722 of the waiting process for the special figure of FIG. 74). As shown in (a) of FIG. 76A, as shown in (b) of FIG. 76A, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effective line and the invalid line. Note that FIG. 77 (B) and FIG. 78 (B1) described later are display operation examples when the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effective line and the ineffective line.

  Part (b) of FIG. 76 (B) is a modification of part (b) of FIG. 76 (A). In (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the dashed-dotted line h is a line between the frame outer upper line f and the upper line b. An alternate long and short dash line i is an intermediate line between the lower outer line g and the lower lower line c.

  The figure on the left side of (b) of FIG. 76 (B) shows the position where the left symbol “3” to be variably displayed appears. The figure on the right side shows the position where the left symbol “3” to be variably displayed disappears. The middle figure shows a scene in which the left symbol “3” to be variably displayed passes on the middle line a. That is, the left symbol "3" is variably displayed in a partial range (between the alternate long and short dash line h and the alternate long and short dash line i) of the decorative symbol display area 5L.

  According to (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the central portion (central portion in the vertical direction) of the left symbol "3" is at a certain timing (a timing between the timing on the left side and the timing on the center side) It is variably displayed on the upper line b. Further, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the central portion of the left symbol "3" is variably displayed on the middle step line a at a certain timing (the timing of the middle diagram). Also, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the central part of the left symbol “3” is on the lower line c at a certain timing (a timing between the timing of the central drawing and the timing of the right drawing) Is displayed variably. Further, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the central portion of the left symbol "3" is not variably displayed on the outer line upper line f at any timing. Further, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the central portion of the left symbol “3” is not variably displayed on the out-of-frame lower line g at any timing. That is, according to (b) of FIG. 76 (B), the left symbol “3” is on the effective line (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e). It is variably displayed, but is not variably displayed on the invalid line (outside upper line f, lower out line g).

  For example, in the high base state, the effect control CPU 90120 may not display the decorative symbol variably on the invalid line as shown in (b) of FIG. 76 (B). Note that FIG. 78 (B2) described later is an example of display operation when the decorative symbol is not variably displayed on the invalid line.

  The position where the decorative pattern appears when the decorative pattern is not variably displayed on the invalid line is the position shown in (b) of FIG. 76 (B) (the position where the central portion of the decorative pattern is on the alternate long and short dash line h). It is not limited. For example, the position at which the decorative pattern appears may be a position where the central portion is slightly lower than the frame upper line f, or a position where the central portion is on the upper line b. It is also good. Further, the position where the decorative pattern disappears when the decorative pattern is not variably displayed on the invalid line is the position shown in (b) of FIG. 76 (B) (the position where the central portion of the decorative pattern is on the alternate long and short dash line i). It is not limited. For example, the position where the decorative pattern disappears may be a position where the central part is slightly above the lower frame line g, or even if the central part is on the lower line c. Good.

  FIGS. 77 and 78 are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 905. FIG. FIG. 77 shows an example of display operation in the low base state. FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (C) show display operations in the low base state arranged in chronological order (FIG. 77 (A) → FIG. 77 (B) → FIG. 77 (C)). In FIG. 77 (also in FIG. 78), the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) in variable display are indicated by broken lines, and the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) in stop display are solid lines It shows by. Further, in FIG. 77 (also in FIGS. 78 to 80), the holding effect and the active display are not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (B), in the low base state, the decorative design is also invalidated on the effective lines (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e). It is also variably displayed on the out-of-frame upper line f and the out-of-frame lower line g).

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A) and FIG. 77 (C), in the low base state, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line and the invalid line. However, in actuality, the decorative pattern may not be stopped and displayed on the invalid line. Specifically, when two left symbols, two middle symbols, and two right symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper line b and lower line c, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the invalid line. I will not. In FIG. 77 (C), the two right symbols are stopped and displayed on upper line b and lower line c respectively (specifically, the right symbol "6" is on upper line b). The stop display is displayed, but the right symbol "5" is stopped and displayed on the lower line c), and the left symbol and the middle symbol are not displayed stop.

  Although FIG. 77 (A) and FIG. 77 (C) show the final stop display (full stop display), the same may be applied to the case of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect. That is, in the low base state, the decorative symbol may perform temporary stop display on the ineffective line and the ineffective line. In addition, the first stop display of the decorative symbol in the re-lottery effect (for example, the stop of "4" "4" "4" in the case of becoming "4" "4" "4" to "7" "7" "7" The same may be applied to the case of display). That is, in the low base state, the first stop display of the decorative symbol in the re-lottery effect may be performed on the ineffective line and the ineffective line.

  FIG. 78 shows an example of display operation in the high base state. 78 (A), 78 (B1) and 78 (C) show the display operation in the high base state in the time series (in order of FIG. 78 (A) → FIG. 78 (B1) → FIG. 78 (C)) It is a line.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (B1), in the high base state, the decorative design is an invalid line (in the middle line a, the upper line b, the lower line c, the upper right line d, the lower right line e). It is also variably displayed on the out-of-frame upper line f and the out-of-frame lower line g).

  As shown in FIG. 78 (A) and FIG. 78 (C), in the high base state, the decorative symbol is displayed stopped on the effective line, but not displayed on the invalid line.

  Although FIG. 78 (A) and FIG. 78 (C) show the final stop display (full stop display), the same may be applied to the case of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect. That is, in the high base state, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped on the activated line, but may not be displayed temporarily on the invalid line. In addition, the first stop display of the decorative symbol in the re-lottery effect (for example, the stop of "4" "4" "4" in the case of becoming "4" "4" "4" to "7" "7" "7" The same may be applied to the case of display).

  FIG. 78 (B2) is a modification of FIG. 78 (B1). 78 (A), 78 (B2) and 78 (C) show the display operation (modification) in the high base state in time series (FIG. 78 (A) → FIG. 78 (B2) → FIG. 78 (C) In the order of As shown in FIG. 78 (B2), in the high base state, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed on the effective line, but may not be variably displayed on the ineffective line.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 905. Specifically, FIG. 79 shows an example of display operation when chance zone presentation is performed. 79 (A) to 79 (G) arrange display operations in chronological order (FIG. 79 (A) → FIG. 79 (B) →..., FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. 79 (G)) It is In FIG. 79 (A) etc., the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed.

  FIG. 79 (A) shows a scene in which the stop display of the finalized decorative symbol is being performed. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (A), for example, the left symbol “4”, the middle symbol “5”, and the right symbol “1” are displayed as the final stop (complete stop display) on the middle line a. It should be noted that in the chance zone effect determining process (step S90161A) executed when there are three first pending storages and there is a third pending storage at the time of FIG. 79 (A), the third one It is assumed that the execution of the chance zone presentation targeting the pending storage is determined (step S9014 of the chance zone presentation determination process).

  FIG. 79 (B) shows a scene where variable display of a decorative pattern is performed in the next variation (the first variation from the scene of FIG. 79 (A)). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (B), the chance zone effect image (character image G4 shown in FIG. 64 (B)) of the first step (first step) is displayed in the operation mode. That is, in step S90544 of the effect processing during variable display (FIG. 73) and step S90732 of the waiting processing per special image processing (FIG. 74, FIG. 75), the effect control CPU 90120 controls the operation of chance zone effect (first stage By executing operation control to display the chance zone effect image in the operation mode, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the first stage chance zone effect image is displayed in the operation mode.

  FIG. 79 (C) shows a scene in which the stop display of the finalized decorative symbol is being performed. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (C), for example, the left symbol "blank", the middle symbol "8" and the right symbol "7" are displayed as the final stop (full stop display) on the middle line a. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (C), the first stage chance zone effect image is displayed in the still mode. That is, in step S 90733 of waiting processing for special image (FIG. 74, FIG. 75), CPU 90120 for effect control controls operation of chance zone effect (operation control for displaying the first stage chance zone effect image in a still mode). By performing this operation, as shown in FIG. 79C, the first-stage chance zone effect image is displayed in a stationary manner.

  FIG. 79 (D) shows a scene in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the next variation (the second variation from the scene in FIG. 79 (A)). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (D), the first-stage chance zone effect image and the second-stage (second step) chance zone effect image (not shown in FIG. 64B) are displayed in the operation mode. It is done. That is, in step S90544 of the effect processing during variable display (FIG. 73) and step S90732 of the waiting processing per special image processing (FIG. 74, FIG. 75), the effect control CPU 90120 controls the operation of the chance zone effect (first step By executing operation control to display the second stage chance zone effect image in the operation mode, the first and second stage chance zone effect images are displayed in the operation mode as shown in FIG. 79 (D). It will be done.

  FIG. 79 (E) shows a scene in which the stop display of the finalized decorative symbol is being performed. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (E), for example, the left symbol “blank”, the middle symbol “7”, and the right symbol “7” are displayed as the final stop (full stop display) on the middle row line a. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (D), the first-stage and second-stage chance zone effect images are displayed in a still mode. That is, in step S 90733 of waiting processing for special image (FIG. 74, FIG. 75), CPU 90120 for effect control displays operation control of chance zone effect (displays first and second step chance zone effect images in a still mode) By executing the operation control), as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the chance zone effect images of the first and second stages are displayed in a still mode.

  FIGS. 79 (F) and 79 (G) show a scene in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the next fluctuation (third fluctuation from the scene in FIG. 79 (A)). Specifically, FIG. 79 (F) shows a scene before reaching the reach state, and FIG. 79 (G) shows the reach state (specifically, the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “on the line rising to the right” Double reach state (2-line reach state, consisting of the reach state formed by 7) and the reach state formed by the left symbol "6" and the right symbol "6" on the lower right line e Also referred to as “double reach”))). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (F), as in the scene of FIG. 79 (D), the chance zone effect images of the first and second stages are displayed in the operation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (G), the third stage (third step) chance zone effect image (not shown in FIG. 64 (B)) is displayed in the operation mode. That is, in step S90544 of the effect processing during variable display (FIG. 73) and step S90732 of processing for waiting for a special image (FIG. 74, FIG. 75), the effect control CPU 90120 performs operation control of chance zone effect (before reaching reach state By displaying the first stage and second stage chance zone effect images in the operation mode, and executing reach control, the third stage chance zone effect image is displayed in the operation mode). As shown in FIG. 79 (F) and FIG. 79 (G), before reaching the reach state, the first and second step chance zone effect images are displayed in the operation mode, and after reaching the reach state, 3 The stage chance zone effect image is displayed in the operation mode.

  In addition, with regard to FIG. 79 (C) and FIG. 79 (E), the chance zone effect image may be displayed in a still mode during the entire period in which the decorative symbol is displayed in the final stop. The chance zone effect image may be displayed in a stationary manner during a certain period. That is, the chance zone effect image may be displayed in a stationary manner in at least a part of the period during which the decorative symbol is displayed in the final stop state.

  Further, with regard to FIG. 79 (B) and FIG. 79 (D) etc., the chance zone effect image may be displayed in the operation mode in the entire period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The chance zone effect image may be displayed in an operation mode during a part of the period. That is, the chance zone effect image may be displayed in the operation mode in at least a part of the period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed.

  Although FIG. 79 shows the relationship between the display mode of the effect by the decorative pattern (display mode of the decorative pattern) and the chance zone effect image used in the chance zone effect, other effects are executed by the pachinko gaming machine 901. The same may be true for the image used. For example, the same may be applied to an image (hold action effect image) used in the hold action effect (the same applies to the hold action cassette effect). That is, the suspension action effect image is displayed in the stationary mode (for example, the operation of the character acting on the suspension display is displayed in the stationary mode) in at least a part of the period in which the decorative symbol is finally displayed and stopped. The hold action effect image may be displayed in the operation mode (for example, the operation of the character acting on the hold display may be displayed in the operation mode) in at least a part of the time period.

  Moreover, the same may be applied to the case of the temporary stop display in the pseudo sequential effect. That is, the chance zone effect image or the hold action effect image is displayed in a stationary mode in at least a partial period in which the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, and the chance zone effect is displayed in at least a partial period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed. An image or a hold action effect image may be displayed in an operation mode.

  In FIG. 64, the display effect such as hold, variable display effect (effect by decorative symbol), and chance zone effect are shown, but the effect executed by the pachinko game machine 901 is not limited to the above effect. For example, an effect using a card (hereinafter, also referred to as "card effect") may be executed. The card effect may be, for example, an effect (one of the main notice effects) in which the presence or absence and the effect mode are determined according to the fluctuation pattern or the like in the variable display start setting process (FIG. 72).

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 905. Specifically, FIG. 80 shows an example of display operation when a card effect is executed. 80 (A) to 80 (F) arrange display operations in chronological order (FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (B) →..., FIG. 80 (E) → FIG. 80 (F)) It is In FIG. 80A and the like, the arrow “矢 印” shown in the display area of the image display device 905 indicates that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed.

  Each of FIG. 80 (A) to FIG. 80 (F) shows a scene where variable display of a decorative symbol is performed in a certain change (one change). Specifically, FIG. 80 (A) shows a scene immediately after the start of variable display, FIG. 80 (F) shows a scene immediately after reaching a reach state, and FIGS. 80 (B) to 80 (E) show , 80 (A) and 80 (F) are shown.

  FIG. 80B shows a scene in which the card image is displayed in a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the content (type) of the card image. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (B), on the left side, a display mode (word "sorry") that allows the player to easily recognize the content of the card image (indication that the card image is "sorry"). A card image (card image "sorry") is displayed in the display mode described in an easy-to-see manner. In addition, a card image "sorry" is a card image corresponding to the big hit expectation degree being low. In the center, a card image (card image “heat”) in a display mode (display mode in which the word “heat” is written in an easy-to-see manner) that allows the player to easily recognize the content of the card image (card image “heat”). ) Is displayed. The card image “heat” is a card image corresponding to the high hit probability. On the right side, a card image (card image “card image“ in a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents of the card image (indication that the card image is “pse The pseudo link is displayed. Note that the card image “pseudo series” is a card image corresponding to the execution of the pseudo series effect.

  FIG. 80C shows a scene in which the card image is displayed in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the content of the card image. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (C), on the left side, the player can not easily recognize the content of the card image (indicating that the card image is “disappointment”) (the word “disapproval”). A card image (a card image "sorry") is displayed in a display manner inconspicuously drawn, specifically, a blurred display manner). In the center, a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents of the card image (indicating that the card image is “heat”) (a display mode in which the word “heat” is hard to see. Specifically, a blurred display mode. Card image (card image "heat") is displayed. On the right side, a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents of the card image (indicating that the card image is “pseudo series”) (a display mode in which it is difficult to see the word “pseudo series”. Specifically, it is blurred. In the display mode, a card image (card image “simulated series”) is displayed. Also, a selection image (a finger image) for selecting one of the three card images is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (D) is a display mode in which one card image selected in FIG. 80 (C) does not allow the player to easily recognize the contents of the card image (a display mode in which the word “heat” is displayed in a difficult manner Represents the scene displayed in). FIG. 80 (E) shows a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the content of the card image selected in FIG. 80 (C) (a display mode in which the word "heat" is written in an easy-to-see manner) Represents the scene displayed in.

  That is, variable display is started (FIG. 80 (A)), first, three card images are displayed in a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents (FIG. 80 (B)). Three card images are displayed in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents (FIG. 80C), and then, one card image selected in the display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents is displayed (FIG. 80 (D)), and then one card image selected in a display mode that allows the player to easily recognize the content is displayed (FIG. 80 (E)), and then it is in the reach state (FIG. 80 (F)). In the card effect shown in FIG. 80, the player is made to feel discomfort by setting the card image portion to a low-visibility aspect such as a display aspect in which the card image portion is blurred (in other words, an aspect difficult for the player to see) I am attracted to the image part.

  In addition, before step S90531 of the variable display start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed, etc., the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence / absence of effect of the card effect and the effect mode according to the type of fluctuation pattern, and When it is determined to execute the card effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined card effect mode may be set as the usage pattern in the process of step S90532 or the like to execute the card effect. For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 has a variation pattern of super reach, as shown in FIG. 80 (B) to FIG. 80 (E), execution of a card effect by an effect mode in which the display mode of the card image is changed. If it is determined, as shown in FIG. 80 (A) to FIG. 80 (F), the card effect is executed during the variable display.

  The card image of the display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents and the card image of the display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents may be stored, for example, in the ROM 90121. The card image of the display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents may be stored, for example, in the ROM 90121, but the card image of the display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents may not be stored. In the embodiment where the player does not store the card image of the display mode in which the content can not be easily recognized, the card image of the display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the content from the card image of the display mode in which the player can easily recognize the content. Can be generated (processed etc.). For example, a card image of a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the content may be generated based on the card image of the display mode in which the player can easily recognize the content before being displayed.

  The card image of the display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the content may be generated from the card image of the display mode in which the player can easily recognize the content using a blurring filter such as a Gaussian filter. Alternatively, a card image of a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents may be generated by pixelation (by performing mosaic processing). That is, a card image of a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents generated as described above may be stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or may be stored in advance in the ROM 90121, for example, before being displayed May be generated as described above.

  In FIG. 80, the card image “sorry”, the card image “heat”, and the card image “pseudo series” are displayed, but the content (type) of the card image is not limited to the above three types. For example, the card image may be slip, the card image “SP”, the card image “to”, the card image “changed”, or the like. The card image "slip" is a card image corresponding to the slip effect being performed. The card image “SP” is a card image corresponding to the execution of the super reach. The card image "I" is a card image corresponding to becoming a big hit. The card image “change (relevant)” is a card image corresponding to a change in the display mode of the active display.

  In addition, although the card effect has been described as one of the main advance effects (or the card effect has been described as the advance effect relating to the change), a card effect not corresponding to the main advance effect may be executed (the above A card effect may be executed as an effect not related to the change). Specifically, for example, the card image “open” or the card image “change (pending)” may be displayed. The card image "open" is a card image corresponding to the fact that the electrically-driven tulip constituting the variable winning prize ball device 6B is opened by a common drawing. The card image “change (pending)” is a card image corresponding to a change in the display mode of the hold display. Moreover, in the aspect which performs special presentation based on formation of predetermined conditions, you may display the card image relevant to the said special presentation. For example, in a mode in which the background image (for example, the background image of the four seasons) is switched according to the switching lottery result of the background image, the card image "background" corresponding to switching the background image is displayed before switching the background image. May be In addition, in the aspect of reproducing the special content for a predetermined time each time a predetermined time has elapsed, a card image “reproduction” corresponding to reproducing the special content may be displayed before reproducing the special content.

  Further, an expectation (0 to 100%) may be given depending on the display mode of the card image. For example, in addition to the card image “slip”, a card image “slip!” May be prepared which has a higher expectation of performing a slip effect than the card image “slip”. In addition to the card image "Heat (" Heat "is a white letter)", the card image "Heat (" Heat "is a red letter) that has a higher hit rate than the card image" Heat ("Heat" is a white letter) " ) May be prepared. Also, in addition to the card image "SP (words in plain white with the word" SP ")", the big hit expectation (possibility of becoming a big hit through super reach) is greater than in the card image "SP (words with plain words" SP ")" You may prepare a high card image "SP (the word" SP "for cherry pattern)".

  Also, the display positions (arrangement order) of the three card images displayed in FIG. 80 (C) are the same as the respective display positions (arrangement order) in FIG. 80 (B), but not necessarily the same. It is also good. That is, the display positions (ordering order) of the three card images in FIG. 80 (B) may be shuffled and displayed in FIG. 80 (C). The three card images displayed in FIG. 80 (B) and FIG. 80 (C) all have different contents (types), but may not necessarily all differ (that is, two out of three are The same card image may be used, or all three cards may be the same card image).

  Although three card images are displayed at one time in FIG. 80 (B) and FIG. 80 (C), the number of sheets displayed at one time in FIG. 80 (B) and FIG. 80 (C) is two or more. It may be four or more. Further, one card image may be displayed in FIG. 80 (B) or FIG. 80 (C), and when one card image is displayed, the one card image is always selected. It may be done. Also, the number displayed at one time in FIG. 80 (B) may be different from the number displayed at one time in FIG. 80 (C). For example, a part of the card image displayed in FIG. 80 (B) may be displayed in FIG. 80 (C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 80, after the variable display is started, the player can easily recognize the content before displaying the three card images in the display manner in which the player can not easily recognize the content. Although a card image of a sheet is displayed (FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (B) → FIG. 80 (C)), three card images are displayed in a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents. It does not have to be (omission of FIG. 80 (B)). That is, after the start of variable display, three card images are displayed in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents without displaying the three card images in a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents. (FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (C)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 80, after three card images are displayed in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents, one card image is displayed in a display mode in which the player can easily recognize the contents. Although one card image is displayed in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the content before (FIG. 80 (C) → FIG. 80 (D) → FIG. 80 (E)), the player is easy It is not necessary to display one card image in a display mode in which the contents can not be recognized (the omission of FIG. 80D). That is, after displaying three card images in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents, the player can display the card image in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents. One card image may be displayed in a display mode in which the contents can be easily recognized (FIG. 80 (C) → FIG. 80 (E)). Further, FIG. 80 (C) may be omitted. If FIG. 80 (C) is omitted, one card image may be selected in FIG. 80 (B).

  Further, when displaying a plurality of card images simultaneously, at least a part of the plurality of images may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents. For example, FIG. 80 (C) is omitted when FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (C) → FIG. 80 (D) → FIG. 80 (E) → FIG. 80 (F) is omitted. The player can easily recognize the content of one or two of the three card images instead of displaying all three card images in a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the content. You may display in the impossible display mode.

  Also, as a card image of a display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents, a blurred image (image generated using a blurring filter) and a pixelized image (image subjected to mosaic processing) are illustrated. The card image of the display mode in which the player can not easily recognize the contents is not limited to the above example. For example, the content may not be easily recognized according to character color, character size, and font. Also, the card image may not be easily recognized by the transmittance of the card image itself (for example, the card image may be translucent) and may not be easily recognized by the color of the card image itself (for example, the card The image may be inconspicuous color).

  In FIG. 80, the card is an image in which the player can easily recognize the contents and an image in which the player can not easily recognize the contents (a card image in which the player can easily recognize the contents of the card, and the player is easy Although the card image which can not recognize the contents of the card was used in, it is not limited to the card. For example, roulette (a roulette image in which the player can easily recognize the contents of the option, and a roulette image in which the player can not easily recognize the contents of the option) may be used. Koji Amida (an Akuji image in which the player can easily recognize the line and the result, and an Amkji image in which the player can not easily recognize the line and the result) may be used.

  Note that instead of displaying an image in which the player can not easily recognize the content, the visibility of the image in which the player can easily recognize the content may be deteriorated. For example, in the case of the transition of FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (B) → FIG. 80 (C) → FIG. 80 (D) → FIG. 80 (E) → FIG. 80 (F), FIG. By displaying another image on the front surface (upper layer) of the three card images displayed in FIG. 80 (B), the visibility of the three card images is deteriorated, or in FIG. 80 (D), The visibility of one card image may be deteriorated by displaying another image on the front surface (upper layer) of one card image displayed at 80 (E). Also, the visibility may be deteriorated by the movement of the image to be recognized (including the movement of the display position). That is, it is not necessary to prepare an image that the player can not easily recognize the contents.

  In the above description, the setting range of the Z value is 0 to 3, but the setting range of the Z value is not limited to the above. Also, the Z value may not necessarily be an integer.

  Further, the Z value is not limited to that shown in FIG. 64. For example, an error image, a demo image, a menu image, a music selection image, a music display image, a right hit notification image, a left hit notification image, a definite variation confirmation The Z value may be set to an image related to notification, an image related to a promotion effect (a probability change promotion effect, a round number promotion effect), an image notified on the gaming state, and the like.

  Further, in the above description, the Z value of the variable display effect image is the same (Z value = "2") depending on whether the decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped, but the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The Z value of the variable display effect image may be made different depending on whether the display is in progress or the stop display. For example, the Z value of the variable display effect image when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be set to a value smaller than the Z value of the variable display effect image when the decorative symbol is variably displayed.

  Further, although the Z value of the decorative symbol (variable display effect image) is described in FIG. 64, the Z value of the symbol (always small symbol) displayed on the image display device 5 separately from the decorative symbol is 0 and 1 A value between them (for example, 0.5 or the like) may be set, or the top priority (Z value = 0) may be set. In addition, it is not necessary to always express the reach state (a state in which all three symbols are displayed in a variable display, or a display in which all three symbols are in a stop display). May be expressed in either of

  In the above description, the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display are the same (the hold display and the active display have the same display priority), but the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display May be different. For example, Z value of active display <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> may be priority of hold display). In addition, the Z value of the small symbol (small symbol for effect) displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is reduced during the super reach may be the same Z value as the active display.

  Further, as shown in (a) of FIG. 76 (B), FIG. 78 (A) and FIG. 78 (C), the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed on the invalid line in the high base state. In other words, in the high base state, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, transparent etc.) which can not be visually recognized on the invalid line. Instead of the invisible mode, the stop display may be performed in the invisible mode. For example, in the high base state, the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed on the invalid line may be translucent or may be a color that is not noticeable.

  As described in FIG. 67, the effect control CPU 90120 starts variable display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like (transition to variable display start setting processing, and subsequently, variable display Transition to middle effect processing). Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the stop display of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the symbol determination designation determination command. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 78 (B1) (a mode in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the invalid line in the high base state), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like. The decorative symbol is displayed (variable display) on the effective line or the invalid line, and the decorative symbol is not displayed on the invalid line (stop display) based on the reception of the symbol determination specification determination command, and the decorative pattern is not displayed on the effective line. Display (stop display). That is, in the high base state, the display of the decorative symbol on the invalid line is started by receiving the variation pattern designating command etc. in the aspect in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the invalid line. The display of the decoration pattern on the top ends. In other words, it starts to display the decorative pattern on the invalid line in a viewable manner by receiving the variation pattern designation command etc., and the aspect on which the decorative pattern on the invalid line can not be visually recognized by receiving the symbol determination specification determination command It is beginning to be displayed (or in a mode that is difficult to see).

  Although it has been described that the display of the decorative design on the invalid line is started by the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like, the display of the decorative design on the invalid line is started regardless of the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command It may be done.

  For example, if the next change fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is not received immediately after the stop display time (for example, 0.5 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 74) has elapsed (ie, the number of pending storages is 0), When the stop display time (or the time obtained by adding the predetermined time to the stop display time) has elapsed, the display of the decorative symbol on the invalid line may be started (the decorative symbol on the invalid line is The display may be started in a visible manner). That is, when the stop display time (or the time obtained by adding the predetermined time to the stop display time) has elapsed, the decorative symbol is displayed on the active line as it is stopped (in a mode in which the decorative symbol on the active line is visible) The decorative symbol may be displayed on the invalid line as a stop (while keeping the display continued) (the decorative symbol on the invalid line may be started to be displayed in a visible manner).

  Further, for example, the display of the decorative pattern on the invalid line may be started before the stop display time elapses. For example, for 0 seconds after the start of the stop display (at the start of the stop display) to 0.4 seconds after the start of the stop display for 0.4 seconds, the decoration pattern is not displayed on the invalid line without stopping display on the effective line Display 0.4 seconds after start of stop display to 0.5 seconds after start of stop display (at the end of stop display) for 0.1 seconds, stop the decoration pattern display on the effective line or the invalid line You may do so. The same applies to the case where the number of pending storages is zero and the case where it is not zero.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the types of normal symbols (symbols other than the blank symbol) are the same in the low base state and the high base state, but depending on the game state The type of symbol may be different. The same applies to the blank pattern.

  Moreover, you may perform production (for example, advance production etc.) using a blank symbol. As an example, the blank symbol may be changed to display the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo continuous effect. For example, when FIG. 79 (E) is a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-series effect, first, the left symbol is tentatively set so that the upper left row (the position of the left symbol “7” in FIG. 79 (E)) becomes a blank symbol. Stop the display, and then (for example, after the right symbol "7" has stopped in the middle as in Fig. 79 (E), etc.), change the blank symbol displayed temporarily stopped on the upper left row to the symbol "7" By causing part of the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-series effect (the left symbol "7" in the upper row and the right symbol "7" in the middle row) and finally stopping the middle symbol "7" in the middle row, A temporary stop symbol in a pseudo continuous effect as shown in FIG. 79 (E) may be displayed.

  Further, FIG. 79 (G) shows double reach, but double reach may have higher expectation than single reach (one-line reach). For example, there is super reach expectation degree (expected degree to become super reach), big hit expectation degree (expected degree to be big hit), expectation degree to be a big hit with many balls (eg, 16R definite variation big hit), usually there is big hit and definite variation big hit In this case, the degree of expectation that the probability change is a big hit, and the degree of expectation that a large number of STs with a large number of times may be increased to the number of STs of the plurality of types. In the case of triple reach (three lines of reach), triple reach may have higher expectations than double reach. In addition, you may make it become a triple reach by changing a blank pattern into a normal pattern.

  In the above description, the effective lines are five lines (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, lower right line e), but the effective lines may not be five lines. For example, the valid lines may be three lines (e.g., middle line a, upper right line d, lower right line e). Also, the number of valid lines may not always be constant. For example, in the case of a special background (special background A for low base state, special background B for high base state, etc.), five effective lines (middle line a, upper line b, lower line c, upper right line d, etc.) The line may be a downward slope line e) or three lines (e.g., middle line a, right upward line d, right downward line e), and one line (e.g., middle line a) when there is no special background.

  In the above description, the direction (scroll direction) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is the vertical direction (vertical direction), but the direction in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is not limited to the vertical direction. For example, it may be left-right direction (lateral direction). Further, in the above description, the decorative design is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but even if the decorative design is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the decorative design on the surface. It is good (that is, it may apply also to what is called a drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-like movable body having the decorative symbol on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine).

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a predetermined effect image (for example, a card image shown in FIG. 80, a character image on the left side of the card image, an image of a finger, etc.) A predetermined effect execution means capable of displaying (for example, a process to be executed before step S90531 of the variable display start setting process (FIG. 72) is performed), and the predetermined effect image is related to the predetermined effect result. Common part (for example, character image on the left side of the card image in FIG. 80, an image of a finger, etc.) and a specific part (for example, the card in FIG. 80) which is different according to the result of the predetermined effect And the predetermined effect execution means is a display with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (C) or FIG. 80 (D) in which the visibility of the specific part is low. Like the second aspect (a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80E) in which the visibility of the specific portion is higher than that of the first mode. Display the effect image.

  According to the above configuration, the specific portion of the predetermined effect image can be focused on, and the portion to be focused on of the displayed predetermined effect image can be easily understood. For example, attention may be given to the sense of incongruity associated with low visibility, or attention may be given to trying to recognize it because the visibility is low.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, the predetermined effect execution unit displays the preview image in the first mode after displaying the preview image in the second mode, and then the second mode. To display the preview image. For example, after the card image is displayed in a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the card in a display mode with low visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (C) or FIG. 80 (D) The image is displayed, and then the card image is displayed in a display mode with high visibility as shown in FIG. 80 (E).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the preview image.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above embodiment includes storage means (for example, the ROM 90121 or the like) for storing the preview image of the second aspect, and the preview image of the first aspect is stored in the storage means The preview image of the second aspect may be generated. For example, it may be generated using a blurring filter such as a Gaussian filter or may be generated by pixelation (with mosaic processing).

  According to such a configuration, the capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above embodiment is a determination means (for example, special) for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, high base state, high certainty state, etc.) advantageous to the player. A process (step S90240) for determining the special view display result in the pattern normal process (FIG. 59), a process (step S90244) for determining the jackpot type, etc., and a display area (for example, an image based on the determination result of the determination means Display means for performing variable display of identification information in the display area of the display device 5 and performing stop display (for example, processing for setting a production control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting process (FIG. 72) Yes, based on the effect control pattern set in step S90532) or in the variable display start setting process. The display process further includes a process (step S90542) and the like for variably displaying the decorative symbol in the rendering process (FIG. 73), and the display area is a specific display area (for example, a solid line in an effective line (FIG. 76A). Shown on the middle line a, the upper line b, the lower line c, the upper right line d, the lower right line e) and the nonspecific display area (for example, a broken line in an invalid line (FIG. 76A) In the first state (for example, low base state etc.), the identification information is stopped and displayed in a visible manner in the non-specific display area, including the above-mentioned frame-outer upper line f and the region on the frame-out lower line g). In the second state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58), the variation category “PA1 ′” or the variation is more likely to occur than the low base state, in which the ratio of shortening the time for the identification information to be stopped and displayed is reduced. Category "PB In a high base state or the like in which the ratio of '' is determined is high, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-specific display area in an invisible or hard-to-visible manner (for example, FIG. 78 (A) or FIG. 78 (C) As shown in, in the high base state, the decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed on the invalid line, or in the high base state, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the invalid line in semitransparent or inconspicuous color).

  According to such a configuration, it is easy to recognize the identification information (the decorative symbol etc. displayed in the stopped state) even in the second state (high base state etc.) in which the stop display time of the identification information is short. Also, in the second state (high base state etc.), if identification information is displayed in the non-specific display area (if a decorative symbol is displayed on an invalid line), there may be a misunderstanding that it looks like a big hit For example, although the display example shown in (a) of FIG. 76A is a stop display example in a low base state where the stop display time is long, the stop display of the display example in a high base where the stop display time is short There is a possibility that misunderstanding may occur as if “7”, “7” and “7” are displayed on the down-slope line e, as opposed to the case shown in FIG. As described above, in the high base state, if the decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed on the invalid line, the misunderstanding as described above hardly occurs.

  In the above embodiment, the game state in which both time saving control (control for shortening the special figure fluctuation time) and high open control (control for making the popular game play an advantage for the player) is performed in a high base state (time saving state). Even if time saving control is performed but high open control is not performed, the identification information may be stopped and displayed on the ineffective line in an invisible or hard to recognize visual condition. That is, the “second state” may be a state in which time saving control or high release control is also performed (high base state), or a state in which time saving control is performed but high release control is not performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, when there is a loss, when the number of pending storages is large, the percentage of determination of the variation category “PA1 ′” is higher than when there are fewer, so When there are many cases, the identification information may be stopped and displayed on the invalid line in an invisible or hard-to-see manner. That is, the "second state" may have a large number of pending storages.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 etc., although the decorative pattern which arrange | positioned alphanumeric characters is used, you may use the decorative pattern which arrange | positions a Chinese number etc. FIG. Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 etc., a decorative symbol with alpha-numeric characters arranged on the lower side is used, but a decorative symbol with alpha-numeric characters etc. may be arranged on the upper side or You may use the decorative design which arranged the alphanumeric character etc. in the central part of. In the case of using a decorative pattern in which alphanumeric characters and the like are arranged on the lower side (or upper side), the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed on an invalid line in the high base state and stopped (that is, different from the above embodiment) ), It is easy to misunderstand that it looks like a big hit in the diagonal direction, but if you do not stop and display a decorative pattern on an invalid line in a high base state (that is, in the case of the above embodiment), Mistakes that look like a big hit in the diagonal direction are less likely to occur. Further, even in the case of using a decorative pattern in which alphanumeric characters and the like are arranged at the central portion in the vertical direction, the above-mentioned misunderstanding may occur depending on the shape of the display area of the image display device 5 and the interval of each line. Although there is a fear, if the decorative pattern is not displayed on the ineffective line in the high base state (that is, in the case of the above embodiment), misunderstanding is less likely to occur.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment is capable of displaying a specific effect image (for example, the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 64 or FIG. 79) during the variable display of identification information. For example, the process of step S90544 of the effect processing during variable display (FIG. 73) and the processing of steps S90732 and S90733 of waiting processing per special view (FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) Can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of a part of (for example, as shown in FIG. 79), and the specific effect execution means is at least part of a period when the identification information is stopped and displayed. The specific effect image is displayed in the stationary mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 79C and FIG. 79E, the chance zone effect image is displayed in the stationary mode)

  According to such a configuration, it is easy to recognize identification information (the decorative symbol etc. displayed in a stopped state).

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment variably displays identification information in a viewable manner in a nonspecific display area (for example, an area on an invalid line) (for example, as shown in FIG. 77B) In the low base state, the decorative design is variably displayed in the form visible in the area on the ineffective line, and as shown in FIG. 78 (B1), the decoration is visible in the form visible in the area on the ineffective line in the high base state. The symbol is displayed variably). In addition, as mentioned above, the decorative symbol in the variable display shown by the broken line is visible.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during variable display. For example, it is possible to preferably execute the turning effect in the pseudo-series effect using the area on the invalid line. In the high base state, as shown in FIG. 78 (B2), the decorative symbol may not be variably displayed in a form that can be visually recognized in the area on the invalid line.

  The other embodiments have been described above, but various effects such as the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 905 The present invention can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a pending | holding display is set to three colors, white, yellow, and red (refer FIG. 70), the display mode of a pending | holding display is not limited to this. For example, the other three colors (for example, three colors of white, blue and red, and three colors of gray, light blue and purple) different from at least one of the above three colors (white, yellow and red) may be used. And may be two or four or more colors. Moreover, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to the active display. Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, there may be a display mode exclusively for active display which is not displayed as the hold display. This will improve interest.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the time of shift, but instead of or in addition to the shift time, the display mode of the hold display may be changed at another timing. For example, it may be changed during variable display of the decorative symbol. The same applies to the active display. Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, interest is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a pending | holding display and the display mode of an active display are determined simultaneously (by determination of 1), you may determine separately. In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display at each display position is collectively determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the hold display after shift may be determined each time the shift is made. In the above embodiment, the display mode of the active display is determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the active display may be determined when displaying in the active display area AHA. Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration.

  In the above embodiment, the card effect is exemplified as the main notice effect, but other effects (step-up notice effect, group notice effect, title notice effect, next notice effect, mini character notice effect, cut-in effect, etc.) It may be. Also by such a configuration, the same effect as the card effect can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A and the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B store reserve data (hold information), they are stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B. Although priority is given to reserve data (see FIG. 59), among the reserve data stored in first special view reserve storage unit 90151A and second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, the ones with the earliest winning order are put on hold Data may be digested. For example, a sorting device may be provided, and the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be made to alternately take place, and the holding data may be digested in the order of winning.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to one having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10. (B) and as shown in FIG. 71 (B) etc., those having a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 (ie, It is a concept that includes 100% and 0% allocations.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the number of rounds is 2 types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, three or more types of rounds may be sufficient. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probability variation big hit is provided as the big hit category is shown, but it may be a gaming machine including the non-probability variation big hit (normally big hit) as the big hit category.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment showed the aspect which carries out the variable display of multiple types of special symbols, such as a number which shows "0"-"8", and a symbol which shows "-", and a display result is derived and displayed, the said variable display Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  In the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the big hit gaming state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-link, one change pattern specification command In the example of transmitting the change pattern, the effect control board 9012 may be notified of the change pattern by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 is before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, on the effect control board 9012 side, effect control in the variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 90560, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and a specific variation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 9012. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main substrate 9011 stores the determination table for random number values (display result determination table, big hit type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the start winning prize. Based on the random number values (MR1 ′ to MR3 ′), the main substrate 9011 refers to the random number value determination table and determines random number value determination processing (determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and variation category determination, and In some cases, the determination of the type of the big hit is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives an example of the determination result determined in the main board 9011 and shows an example of executing pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the mode of execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the random number value determination table is stored in the effect control substrate 9012 and the random number itself is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying random number values from the main substrate 9011) Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012), the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted in the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value, refers to the random number value determination table and refers to the random number value. The pre-reading notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 9012. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute the process of determining the random number value, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives the random number values (MR 1 ′ and MR 2 ′) and performs determination of whether or not to be a big hit and determination of the type of big hit if it is a big hit, The determination result of the variation category determined by the main substrate 9011 based on the random value (MR3 ′) may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the advance notice / notification effect based on the judgment result judged by itself and the judgment result judged by the main board 9011.

  The random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  In addition, for example, a gaming machine that gives a gaming score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a gaming value of a size specified by recording information of a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, a structure, an array, etc.). That is, although the determination value (decision value) to be compared with the extracted random value may be stored together in the ROM 90101, it may be dispersed (dotted) in a plurality of locations in the ROM 90101 and stored. Alternatively, the ROM 90101 may store an equation or program for outputting the result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 47) when the extracted random number value is input. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 90121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A, 4B special symbol display device 5 image display device R adjustment result image P operation promotion image Ar display area of a decorative symbol 7 special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R speaker 9 game effect lamp 11 main board 12 effect control board 13 voice control board 14 lamp control board 100 microcomputer for game control 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control
123 Display control section 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A 1st special symbol display device 904B 2nd special symbol display device 905 Image display device 905HL 1st start winning memory display area 905HR 2nd start winning memory display area 905H start winning memory display area 906A normal winning ball device 906B normal variable winning ball device 907 special variable winning ball device 908 speaker 909 lamp 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 9014 lamp control board 9015 relay board 9016 character control board 9017 Movable character 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A 1st starting opening switch 9022B 2nd starting opening switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 0100 game control microcomputer 90101,90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 90126 RTC circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and deriving and displaying a display result,
A predetermined effect execution unit capable of displaying a predetermined effect image as a result of the predetermined effect;
The predetermined effect image is composed of a common portion which is a common mode regardless of the result of the predetermined effect, and a specific portion which is an aspect different according to the result of the predetermined effect,
The predetermined effect execution means displays the predetermined effect image in the first mode in which the visibility of the specific portion is low, and then the predetermined effect image in the second mode in which the visibility of the specific portion is higher than the first aspect Can be displayed,
Adjustment means capable of adjusting the rendering effect according to the adjustment operation by the player at least during execution of the variable display;
Adjustment image display means for displaying an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period;
Specific effect execution means capable of displaying a specific effect image during execution of variable display;
Error image display means for displaying an error image notifying of occurrence of an abnormality;
And further
When the display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the adjusted image display means makes the adjusted image invisible or difficult to recognize in a period in which the display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period.
The specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information,
The specific effect execution means sets the display mode of the specific effect image as a stationary mode at a position overlapping on the front side of the identification information in a period in which the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, according to the identification information Also in the position which does not overlap in the front side, the display mode of the specific effect image is not set as the stationary mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the error image display means preferentially displays the error image over the display of the adjustment image and the specific effect image , and does not delete the error image even while the display result is derived and displayed.